Home

Avaya Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting

1. 277 mm dd yy 11 48 51 279 DEBUG 2 OADER 32 Loader serving request for tftp exe from 0x1000602c 278 mm dd yy 11 48 51 291 DEBUG 3 OOADER 27 Dynamic loader transaction with slot 2 server for snmp exe start address 0x304A86E0 size 0x00007204 checksum 0x00211745 279 mm dd yy 11 48 51 295 DEBUG 3 OADER 27 Dynamic loader transaction with slot 2 server for tftp exe start address 0x304A2190 size 0x00003f54 checksum 0x00127cd1 280 mm dd yy 11 48 51 303 DEBUG 2 OADER 33 Loader service completed for tftp exe 0x1000602c 281 mm dd yy 11 48 51 318 DEBUG 3 OADER 28 Dynamic loader completed transaction for tftp exe 282 mm dd yy 11 48 51 326 DEBUG 3 OOADER 15 Loader starting application tftp exe address 0x304e7f20 gate id 0x0001c 283 mm dd yy 11 48 51 326 DEBUG 2 OADER 33 Loader service completed for snmp exe 0x1000602b 284 mm dd yy 11 48 51 330 INFO 3 FTP 2 Protocol initializing 285 mm dd yy 11 48 51 330 DEBUG 3 FTP 15 Subsystem transitioned to DOWN state 286 mm dd yy 11 48 51 357 DEBUG 3 OADER 28 Dynamic loader completed transaction for snmp exe 287 mm dd yy 11 48 51 365 DEBUG 3 OADER 15 Loader starting application snmp exe address 0x304ebe90 gate id 0x00019 288 mm dd yy 11 48 51 377 INFO 3 SNMP 7 Protocol initializing 289 mm dd yy 11 48 51 408 DEBUG 3 SNMP 36 Agent received
2. 33 mm dd yy 11 48 21 273 WARN 2 GAME 8 slot 3 became disconnected 34 mm dd yy 11 48 21 343 DEBUG 2 GAME 73 REMOTE 3 FSM DOWN gt SYNC 0000fa 90000007 000171 00000000 00000000 35 mm dd yy 11 48 21 386 DEBUG 2 GAME 73 REMOTE 3 FSM SYNC gt ACTIV 0000fb 90000006 000172 20000000 20000000 36 mm dd yy 11 48 21 386 INFO 2 GAME 10 slot 3 became re connected 37 mm dd yy 11 48 21 602 DEBUG 3 GAME 73 REMOTE 2 FSM HOLD gt DOWN 000171 aQ000007 0000f9 00000000 00000000 38 mm dd yy 11 48 21 658 DEBUG 3 GAME 73 REMOTE 2 FSM DOWN gt SYNC 000171 aQ000006 O000fa 10000000 10000000 39 mm dd yy 11 48 21 860 DEBUG 3 GAME 73 REMOTE 2 FSM SYNC gt ACTIV 000175 a0000007 O000fd 10000000 10000000 40 mm dd yy 11 48 21 860 INFO 3 GAME 10 slot 2 became re connected A 3 Troubleshooting Routers The router is loading the router software image 41 mm dd yy 11 48 22 269 DEBUG 2 BOOT 13 Image loaded jumping to 0x30024000 42 mm dd yy 11 48 26 007 INFO 2 GAME 11 Starting image rel 9 00 Fri Jul 28 17 12 26 EST 1995 The software running in Slot 2 synchronized the system clock WCLCK with the other slots in the router 43 mm dd yy 11 48 25 265 DEBUG 2 GAME 124 WCLK set new b1506bc9 84a00000 old b1506bc9 44000000 rtc b1506bca 00000000 WCLK set err 0
3. SNMP successfully loaded from the router software image and the SNMP gate soloist SNMP_START elects which slot it will run on 154 mm dd yy 11 48 39 752 DEBUG 2 LOADER 30 Image snmp exe loaded successfully from 2 bn exe 155 mm dd yy 11 48 39 756 DEBUG 2 NVFS 64 NVFS manager is closing file bn exe 156 mm dd yy 11 48 39 764 DEBUG 2 LOADER 15 Loader starting application snmp exe address 0x304a86e0 gate id 0x00019 157 mm dd yy 11 48 39 768 INFO 2 SNMP 7 Protocol initializing 158 mm dd yy 11 48 39 791 DEBUG 2 SNMP 36 Agent received new community public assigned index 1 159 mm dd yy 11 48 39 811 DEBUG 2 SNMP 38 Agent received new manager 0 for community index 1 161 mm dd yy 11 48 39 861 DEBUG 2 SN 40 Agent spawned the Trap Manager 162 mm dd yy 11 48 39 869 DEBUG 2 GAME 23 SOLO 0x0001b election opening 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 163 mm dd yy 11 48 39 869 DEBUG 2 SNMP 24 Trap Manager initializing The driver for the Ethernet chip set ILACC loads onto Slot 2 and initializes 164 mm dd yy 11 48 39 943 DEBUG 2 LOADER 30 Image ilacc exe loaded successfully from 2 bn exe 165 mm dd yy 11 48 39 943 DEBUG 2 NVFS 64 NVFS manager is closing file bn exe 166 mm dd yy 11 48 39 951 DEBUG 2 LOADER 15 Loader starting application ilacc exe address 0x304a6100 gate id 0x00040
4. The media carrying the packet If the media is Sync the name of the protocol on the Sync interface appears instead of the media The number of bytes in the packet The direction of the packet Rx for incoming packets and Tx for outgoing packets e The remaining lines show the data in the packet in hexadecimal format Troubleshooting Routers Example 1 Enter the following command to display all packets associated with Line Number 102101 pktdump 102101 Pkt 1 mm dd yy 10 20 26 430 CSMACD 60 Rx 00000000 01 80 c2 00 00 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 26 42 42 00000010 03 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 00 00000020 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 80 07 00 00 14 00 00000030 02 00 Of 00 3f 09 ef df 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 Pkt 2 mm dd yy 10 20 28 196 CSMACD 60 Rx 00000000 00 00 a2 03 cl 66 00 00 a2 03 cl 66 81 02 01 01 00000010 00 00 00 00 00 1 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 00 00000020 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 80 07 00 00 14 00 00000030 02 00 Of 00 51 51 Of a3 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 Pkt 3 mm dd yy 10 20 28 462 CSMACD 60 Rx 00000000 00 00 a2 00 93 c5 00 00 a2 00 93 c5 81 02 01 01 00000010 00 00 00 00 30 5b 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000020 a9 4b 16 aa e9 1d 00 00 00 00 a8 c0 00 00 00 00 00000030 14 00 02 00 Of 00 b6 05 5a 51 Of 00 00 00 00 00 Example 2 Enter the following command to display all packets starting with Packe
5. lt IP_address gt is the IP address of the router Example connect 1 1 1 1 3 Enter the following command to specify that the file to be transferred is binary mode binary 4 Enter the following command to retrieve a copy of the file get lt filename gt lt filename gt is the name displayed after you issued the get command in Getting the Name of the Packet Capture File Example get PCAP0400 5 Enter the following command to terminate TFTP quit Using XMODEM to Transfer the File Enter the following Technician Inteface command to transfer a copy of the Packet Capture file from the router s memory xmodem sb lt filename gt lt filename gt is the name displayed after you issued the get command in Getting the Name of the Packet Capture File Note We support only single file mode for the XMODEM protocol We do not support the YMODEM protocol B 32 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Displaying the File You can use the Packet Dump utility to display a Packet Capture file that you retreived from the router The Site Manager installation software installs the Packet Dump utility on the following platforms e On DOS PCs in the Wwf directory The filename is pktdump dos e On SPARCstations in the usr wf bin directory The filename is pktdump spc The SPARCstation version runs only under SunOS These utilities are also available in the perm pkt_dump directo
6. 12 mm dd yy 11 47 57 007 INFO 3 GAME 11 Starting image rel lt revision_no gt boot Day MMM DD 00 12 43 EDT yyyy Because the router received instructions to perform a named boot that is it received instructions to boot with a specified router software image or configuration file on a specified slot Slot 2 the system does not query the backplane for the router software image Slot 2 becomes the server of the router software image The router bootstraps the loader software and loads the router software image in this example bn exe from the memory card in Slot 2 25 mm dd yy 11 48 06 058 DEBUG 3 GAME 66 BackBone s became re connected starting Loader LOADER starting gate 0x0000e 0x3050ced2 env 0x00000000 flags 0x00000001 26 mm dd yy 11 48 08 054 DEBUG 2 GAME 66 BackBone s became re connected starting Loader LOADER starting gate 0x0000e 0x3050ced2 env 0x00000000 flags 0x00000001 27 mm dd yy 11 48 12 695 DEBUG 2 NVFS 37 Memory Card Inserted FLASH EMBEDDED ALGORITHMS Memory Type Detected Flash media info Mfg ID 0x1 Device ID 0x29 number of chips 8 28 mm dd yy 11 48 12 695 DEBUG 2 BOOT 6 Found image bn exe on local file system booting 29 mm dd yy 11 48 14 507 DEBUG 2 BOOT 12 Image is in compressed format decompressing FSM finite state machine messages indicate slot to slot commun
7. Each filter has its own set of parameters They are as follows e Type Determines whether Packet Capture terminates when it finds a match copies a packet when it matches it to the string or copies every packet on a circuit e Match the hexadecimal number or string of characters that Packet Capture uses to compare to the data in a packet e Reference Offset and Size the data within the packet to compare with the string Reference identifies the field of the packet Offset determines the number of bytes after the Reference with which to begin the comparison Size determines the number of bytes to compare to the string Packet Capture also supports one Group parameter for each packet direction The Group parameter allows you to specify whether the packet must match both Filter 1 and Filter 2 in order for Packet Capture to copy it Troubleshooting Routers Refer to the following sections to set the parameters for each filter Note To avoid confusion configure all of the parameter settings of one filter before going to the next For example configure all of the Receive Filter 1 parameters before configuring the Receive Filter 2 parameters Setting the Filter Response to a Match Enter the following Technician Interface command to set the response to the filter set wfPktCaptureEntry lt attribute _no gt lt line_no gt lt value gt commit lt attribute_no gt is 14 for Receive Filter 1 14 represents the
8. Filter the log to display only messages from the Token Ring entity running on the slots experiencing the problem The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eTOKEN s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eTOKEN s3 s4 If Token Ring Debug Event 36 Connector MAU lt SlotConnector gt Ring Status Change lt 4_digit_hex_code gt appears convert the 4 digit number from hexadecimal to binary Assign the position numbers 0 through 10 to the first 11 digits from left to right Look for the position number of the 1 bit in the following list e 0 indicates signal loss e indicates a hardware error e 2 indicates a software error e 3 indicates a transmitter beacon e 4 indicates a lobe wire fault e 5 indicates an automatic removal error e 6 is reserved for future use e 7 indicates a remove received e 8 indicates a counter overflow e 9 indicates a single station e 10 indicates a ring recovery 5 24 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem 2 If you are using the Technician Interface enter the following command to list the instances of the wfTokenRingEntry object list instances wfTokenRingEntry 3 If you are using the Technician Interface enter the following command to display the values of the wfTokenRingEntry object for the instance in question get wfTokenRingEntry lt instance gt Or use the wfLine gt wfTokenRingTable
9. 1 Filter the log to display only messages from the ATM entity running on the slots experiencing the problem The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eATM s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eATM s3 s4 Note Configuring ATM Services includes instructions on reading ATM log messages 2 Use the Technician Interface to display the attributes associated with the wfAtmInterfaceConfEntry object The Quick Get path to this group is wfLine gt wfAtmInterfaceGroup gt wfAtmCommonGroup gt wfAtmInterfaceConfTable The instance associated with this object is the line no These attributes show the configuration of the ATM port including the aggregate cell rate and the maximum number of VCs on the port 3 Use the Technician Interface to display the attributes associated with the wfAtmVclConfEntry object The Quick Get path to this group is wfLine gt wfAtmInterfaceGroup gt wfAtmCommonGroup gt wfAtmVclConfTable The attributes show the VCL configuration including the mode direct group or hybrid and the cell rates burst sustainable or peak 4 Display the attributes associated with the wfAtmVclStatsEntry object The Quick Get path to this group is wfLine gt wfAtmInterfaceGroup gt wfAtmCommonGroup gt wfAtmVclStatsTable 5 2 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem The attributes include the number of cells received and transmitted and the
10. Dynamic Loader 0x00076 Connection TCP Open req Client on TCP Opened Connection Client on 364 mm dd yy 11 50 47 569 INFO 3 TELNET 4 anager initializing 365 mm dd yy 11 50 47 598 DEBUG 3 TCP 14 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 TCB 0x30530670 366 mm dd yy 11 50 47 639 DEBUG 3 LOADER 33 service completed for tn exe 0x200040df 367 mm dd yy 11 50 47 660 INFO 3 TCP 6 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 TCB 0x30530670 368 mm dd yy 11 50 47 660 INFO 3 TELNET 5 anager listening on TCP port 23 369 mm dd yy 11 50 47 745 DEBUG 2 NVFS 64 is closing file bn exe 370 mm dd yy 11 50 47 766 DEBUG 2 OADER 27 loader transaction with slot 3 server for tn exe start address 0x304A3CB0 size 0x00009808 checksum 0x002bb03b 371 mm dd yy 11 50 47 853 DEBUG 2 OADER 28 loader completed transaction for tn exe 372 mm dd yy 11 50 47 866 DEBUG 2 OADER 15 starting application tn exe address 0x3046ff90 gate id 373 mm dd yy 11 50 47 866 INFO 2 ELNET 4 anager initializing 374 mm dd yy 11 50 47 886 DEBUG 2 TCP 14 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 TCB 0x304e6830 375 mm dd yy 11 50 47 923 DEBUG 2 IP 36 128 128 2 2 for TCP local 23 remote 0 is up 376 mm dd yy 11 50 47 943 INFO 2 TCP 6 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 TCB 0x304e6830 377 mm dd yy 11 50 47 943 INFO 2 TELNET 5 anager listening on TCP port 23 378 mm dd yy 11 50 49 031 DEBUG 2 IP 36 128 128 2 2 for TCP loc
11. bin Enter put lt filename gt if you are sending a file or get lt filename gt if you are retrieving a file When a message indicates that a successful binary transmission occurred enter the quit command to exit the FTP session 8 3 Appendix A Reading the Event Log This appendix provides examples and explanations of the descriptive text in event messages including debug messages It includes the following sections 7 System Startup 73 Dial on Demand Raise DTR Log e Dial on Demand V 25bis e MCTI Log Information in a Lab Testing Environment Refer to the Configuring ATM Services manual for sample ATM events Note To promote readability this appendix does not show redundant messages or those that do not pertain to the topic This appendix does not identify the components of an event Refer to Event Messages for Routers and BNX Platforms for this information A 1 Troubleshooting Routers System Startup The following sample message is from a log of a Series 7 router after we restarted it by entering the boot 2 2 log cfg command This message indicates that the system is preparing the router software image 29 mm dd yy 11 48 14 507 DEBUG 2 BOOT 12 Image is in compressed format decompressing The boot PROM generates the following message for each slot This message shows the revision of the boot PROM on the FRE processor module not the revision of software
12. A 18 Reading the Event Log The following messages appear even if you did not connect a modem to the router Unlike V 25bis Raise DTR does not look for a pin signal to detect whether the port is attached to a modem 39 mm dd yy 14 14 04 104 INFO SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 52 Connector COM2 Circuit has been brought up 40 mm dd yy 14 14 04 104 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Line Mgr received line ready for line 2 41 mm dd yy 14 14 04 104 INFO SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 10 Sync Line 2 available for dial on demand pool 2 42 mm dd yy 14 14 04 108 INFO SLOT 2 SYNC Code 11 Connector COM2 providing LLCl service 43 mm dd yy 14 14 04 636 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM2 FSM State RDTR_WAIT_DATA_OR_IND 1 Connector COM2 FSM Event RDTR_EVENT_CD_UP 6 isdn flags 0x24 44 mm dd yy 14 15 07 770 INFO SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 23 Data received for dial on demand circuit 3 The log messages stop here until you connect and turn on a modem After you do this the router raises DTR to signal the local modem to dial the phone number of the remote modem The router then pings the remote side of the dial on demand link and displays a data available message when it receives a response 45 mm dd yy 14 15 07 774 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM2 FSM State RDTR_WAIT_DATA_OR_IND 1 Connector COM2 FSM Event RDTR_EVENT_DATA_AVAIL 5 isdn flags Ox2c 46 mm dd yy 14
13. Run Packet Capture This appendix include the following sections Overview Implementation Notes 73 Getting Started Using Optional Features 73 Configuration Examples Displaying Event Messages Issued by Packet Capture Using a Sun Workstation or DOS PC to Display Packets 73 Converting a Packet Capture File to Network General Sniffer Format Reference Guide to Packet Capture Packet Capture allows you to examine packets passing through selected circuits on a Bay Networks router It copies the packets from the circuits to a file in the router s memory You can then open the file and view the packets in order to troubleshoot a problem The following routers and physical media services support Packet Capture Routers AN ANH AFN ASN ALN FN LN CN BLN BLN 2 BCN Physical media services CSMA CD Ethernet synchronous T1 E1 MCT1 Token Ring FDDI HSSI ISDN B 1 Troubleshooting Routers You can use Packet Capture to do the following e Copy all incoming packets outgoing packets or both e Filter and copy incoming packets outgoing packets or both e Filter incoming packets outgoing packets or both and copy only selected contents of those packets You can terminate Packet Capture as follows e Enter a command to terminate it immediately e Configure it to terminate itself when the Packet Capture file fills e Configure it to term
14. Specify the Reference with which to begin the comparison set wfPktCaptureEntry 26 102101 1 26 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Ref attribute Specify the number of bytes after the Reference with which to begin the comparison set wfPktCaptureEntry 25 102101 0 25 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Offset attribute Specify the number of bytes in the packet to compare with the string set wfPktCaptureEntry 27 102101 6 27 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Size attribute B 27 Troubleshooting Routers 5 Specify the string as the hexadecimal number ffffffffffff set wfPktCaptureEntry 28 102101 Oxffffffffffff 28 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Match attribute 6 Specify that Packet Capture copy a packet only if it matches both the Receive Filter 1 Match and Receive Filter 2 Match parameter settings set wfPktCaptureEntry 29 102101 2 commit 29 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Group attribute Displaying the Current Packet Capture Configuration Settings Enter the following command to display the current Packet Capture configuration get wfPktCaptureEntry lt ine_no gt lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command The Technician Interface displays a value for each attribute Go to the Reference Guide section for a desc
15. show dslel port DS1E1 Port Status Slot Conn State MTU Loopback Accept BERT Line Line FDL FDL State Loopback Mode Type Coding Type Addr 4 T Red Alarm 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF AMI AT amp T BY 5 2 Red Alarm 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF AMI AT amp T BY A 35 Troubleshooting Routers 2 entries in table If you configure the primary clock source as the Port 2 loop and the secondary clock source as the Port 1 loop both clocks fail and the following messages appear in the log 62 mm dd yy 10 44 50 734 WARNING SLOT 3 DS1E1 Code 14 Connector COM2 Loss of signal failure 63 mm dd yy 10 44 50 734 INFO SLOT 3 DS1E1 Code 23 Primary and Sec clocks unoperational Switching to Internal Clock Source The following message appears if you mismatch the line coding In this example the line coding of one side is AMI and the other is B8ZS binary eight zeros substitution 234 mm dd yy 09 01 43 121 INFO SLOT 2 DS1E1 Code 24 Connector COM1 B8ZS code received on port configured for AMI If you set the Line Type to ESF many messages indicate bipolar violations on the side configured for AMI Ti prompt gt show dslel fdl ansil DS1E1 Facility Data Link FDL errors first half ANSI 403 mode Slot Conn CRC BPV OOF FE ES Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts 2 1 65535 964252 0 0 1675 A 36 Appendix B Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Overview
16. tureE tureE tureE tureE tureE tureE tureE tureE try try try try try try try try try try try try try try try try wfF wfF wfF wfFE wfF wfFE wfF wfF wfF wfF wfF wfF wfF wfFP wfF wfF tCap tCap tCap tCap tCap tCap a Q W O tCap tCap tCap tCap ct Q W O tCap tCap tCap AA AAAA AA gg sg gg Oa tCap turel turel tureT turel turel turel turel tureT turel turel CXF 1 TxF 1 XF XF l tureRxFl tureRxF1l1 tureRxFl tureRxF1 tureRxFl tureRxFl XF 1 trloffset 1021 trlRef 102101 ltrlSize 102101 trlMatch tr2Type 102101 tr20ffset 1021 tr2Ref 102101 tr2Size 102101 tr2Match tr2Group tr2Type 102101 1021 1021 102101 CXF 1 CXF 1 XF CXF 1 CXF 1 tr2Ref 102101 tr20ffset 1021 ltr2Size 102101 tr2Match 1021 tr2Group 1021 Displaying Event Messages Issued by Packet Capture Enter the following Technician Interface command to display the Packet Capture event messages log fftwid ePCAP Refer to Event Messages for Routers and BNX Platforms for information about the events Using a Sun Workstation or DOS PC to Display Packets This section includes the following topics e Getting the Name of the Packet Capture File e Using FTP to Transfer the File e Using TFTP to Transfer the File e Using XMODEM to Transfer
17. 5 17 dynamic adjacency ID 6 22 dynamic mode Configuration Manager 1 2 E E1 Packet Capture B 8 echo requests 7 7 election process A 5 enable attribute 6 30 environment variables 7 3 ESF extended super frame A 35 Ethernet 5 6 to 5 11 heartbeat test 5 10 memory errors 5 9 Packet Capture B 8 B 48 event messages dial on demand raise DTR A 18 to A 22 dial on demand V 25bis A 22 to A 28 MCT1 A 28 to A 36 system startup A 2 to A 17 Events Manager tool 1 5 explicit addressing 5 21 F fail LED 4 4 fault event messages 1 7 1 9 3 20 faxing copies to Bay Networks 8 3 FDDI 5 11 to 5 13 cable colors 4 5 Packet Capture B 8 B 54 ports loopback testing on 4 5 FDL Facility Data Link disable payload option A 30 fiber colors 4 5 file was inaccessible message 7 4 filenames Packet Capture B 30 filtering event messages 1 6 to 1 8 packets with Packet Capture B 19 to B 25 B 44 to B 48 format of an instance 1 15 forwarding tables memory shortage 3 12 saving 1 22 Frame Check Sequence FCS B 4 frame relay 5 14 to 5 16 Packet Capture B 50 Frame Relay Switch and SMDS Switch Packet Capture B 51 frames clipped 5 10 free space 3 11 FRE II memory limitations 3 13 FSI FDDI System Interface 5 11 FTP 6 8 to 6 9 memory card error 3 11 Packet Capture files B 30 FTP file server Bay Networks 8 3 fuse 3 2 Index 3 G GAME Gate Access Managemen
18. 6 Refer to one of the following sections if it applies to your problem 73 Unable to Load SNMP MIB or File Was Inaccessible Message e Unable to Run Module Message Unable to Load SNMP MIB or File Was Inaccessible Message If messages like the following appear add swap space to your workstation wfsm unable to load the SNMP MIB c3202 wfsm The SNMP MIB could not be loaded from the file usr wt lib WFMIB defs Either the file was inaccessible or not enough memory to load file Unable to Run Module Message Before starting Site Manager make sure that you are in a directory for which you have write permission If you start Site Manager in a directory where you do not have write access you will not be able to start the Site Manager tools A message such as Unable to Run Configuration Module appears 7 4 Troubleshooting a Site Manager Problem Cannot Establish a Site Manager Session with the Router If the connection to the router fails to establish do the following 1 Make sure the IP address in the Router Connections window matches the IP address of the router Increase the timeout and retries settings and retry Make sure that the IP address of the Site Manager workstation is within the list of the router s community managers You can do this by using another Site Manager workstation or by using the Technician Interface Refer to one of the following sections e Using an Alternati
19. Consequently users of the network may lose their connections If possible schedule such configuration changes at a time that will minimize network disruption Object and attribute names can be long and are case sensitive To reduce errors we recommend that you use the number of an attribute rather than name it When entering a get command you can insert an asterisk in place of an attribute to display all of the attribute values of an instance For example the following command displays the value of all of the attributes of the instance 10 1 Slot 10 Connector 1 The attributes in this example are a representative sample get wfCSMACDEntry 10 1 wf CSMACDEntry wfCSMACDDelete 10 1 1 wf CSMACDEntry wfCSMACDEnable 10 1 1 wfCSMACDEntry wfCSMACDState 10 1 1 wf CSMACDEntry wfCSMACDSlot 10 1 10 wf CSMACDEntry wfCSMACDConnector 10 1 1 wf CSMACDEntry wfCSMACDCct 10 1 19 Troubleshooting Routers You can also insert an asterisk in place of the instance in a get command to display all of the values of a single attribute For example the following command displays the wfCSMACDState of all of the instances The specification of the wfCSMACDState attribute in the csmacd mib file states 1 means up and 2 means down Note that you can use this method to display all instances without having to enter the list instances lt object gt command get wfCSMACDEntry 3 wf CSMACDEntry wfCSMAC
20. Filter the log to display only messages from the Sync entity running on the slots experiencing the problem The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eSYNC s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eSYNC s3 s4 If you see a message like the following refer to Troubleshooting the Internal Clock Settings Lab Environments Only later in this chapter Warning Sync Code 40 Connector COM2 clock speed does not match other ports Use the Technician Interface to look at the values of the following attributes in the wfSyncEntry object Display and record these statistics wait 1 minute and repeat Compare the statistics shown each time to determine whether the media is currently experiencing problems If the error statistics change check the reception and transmission statistics of the other ports in the same slot The get command is next to the attribute name Or use this Quick Get path to access them wfLine gt wfSyncTable e wfSyncRuntsRx get wfSyncEntry 51 This shows the number of frames received that are smaller than minimum length Usually indicates a clocking problem on the line e wfSyncBadFramesRx get wfSyncEntry 49 Frames received that were unrecognizable May indicate underflow errors or an out of phase clock on the remote side e wfSyncLackRescRx get wfSyncEntry 42 and wfSyncLackRescRx get wfSyncEntry 43 5 19 Trouble
21. Instructions and Examples later in this appendix B 45 Troubleshooting Routers Parameters Reference Packet Capture supports four Reference parameters The MIB information is as follows Saat Filter Attribute Name Attribute MIB Object ID irection No No Incoming 1 wfPktCaptureRxFltr1Ref 16 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 16 Incoming 2 wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Ref 26 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 26 Outgoing 1 wfPktCaptureTxFltr1Ref 21 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 21 Outgoing 2 wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Ref 32 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 32 Default 1 Options 11213 Function Indicates the field in the packet to match Instructions Set to one of the following 1 for the first byte of the packet Use this setting if you want the copied portion of the packet to contain Media Access Control information 2 for data link 3 for multicast Specify 3 if you want to use a special filter to make sure the right most bit of a byte is a 1 To specify a multicast bit for Ethernet specify 3 Then set the offset to 0 To specify a source routing bit for Token Ring specify 3 Then set the offset to 6 B 46 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Parameters Size Packet Capture supports four Size parameters The MIB information is as follows ea Filter Attribute Name Attribute MIB Object ID irection No No Incoming 1 wfPktCaptureRxFltr1Size 17 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 17 Incoming 2 wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Size 27 1 3 6
22. Starting Layer 2 The Line Manager initialized Example 3 mm dd yy 03 15 49 393 INFO SLOT 1 SWSERV Code 65 Line Manager Initializing The basic rate interface BRI digital subscriber loops DSLs become active Example 2 mm dd yy 03 15 42 755 INFO SLOT 1 ISDN_BRI Code 8 ISDN BRI2 DSL 0 Interface enabled ISDN assigns the terminal endpoint identifiers TEIs Example 31 mm dd yy 03 16 10 541 INFO SLOT 1 ISDN Code 4 TEI 64 assigned on DSL 0 ISDN BRI in N America only The switched access service SWSERV entity registers one or more Service Profile Identifiers SPIDs Example 30 mm dd yy 03 16 10 439 INFO SLOT 1 SWSERV Code 102 Sending Registration for SPID1 4002 on DSL 0 The ISDN configuration includes the correct switch type Example 11 mm dd yy 03 15 49 517 INFO SLOT 1 SWSERV Code 136 ISDN Configured for switch type BRI NI1 6 28 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Look at the attribute values of the following MIB objects e wflIsdnSwitchCfgEntry e wfPppCircuitEntry e wfSwservOptsEntry e wfPppLineEntry e wfIsdnBrilnterfaceEntry e wfPppWhoamiEntry e wfSwservOutPhoneNumEntry e wfIsdnLocalPhoneNumEntry e wfIsdnPoolEntry e wflIsdnCallInfoEntry If a call fails do the following 1 2 Verify that a line is available from a pool to make a call Verify that a call setup is in the log and that the calling and cal
23. and view packets in hexadecimal format You can save the data in a Network General Sniffer format file transfer the file to a network analyzer and use the analyzer to parse the data We recommend that you use Packet Capture to capture data generated at remote routers save it in Network General Sniffer format files and use TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol or FTP File Transfer Protocol to transfer the files to a site where you can open the files with a network analyzer Appendix B provides detailed instructions on how to use Packet Capture Using Inbound Telnet to Access the Technician Interface Versions 7 60 and higher allow you to use Telnet to establish a Technician Interface session with a router Note We strongly recommend that you learn how to establish an inbound Telnet session with the router in order to troubleshoot problems from a remote site To make Telnet a configurable option in the Protocols menu create and enable TCP Transmission Control Protocol and Telnet Server as follows 1 From the Configuration Manager window select Protocols gt Global Protocols gt TCP gt Create TCP 2 Select Protocols gt Global Protocols gt Telnet Server gt Create Telnet Server The Telnet Configuration window appears 3 Change the settings to the ones you want or use the default settings and click OK 1 21 Troubleshooting Routers Unlike the Series 5 software more than one user can establish an inbound or outbound T
24. available free space 3 11 B8ZS binary eight zeros substitution A 36 babbling transmitter errors 5 8 BablErrorTx 5 8 backing up files 1 3 backplane BOFL breath of life 3 17 to 3 18 backplane command 7 6 bad fwd receive buffer checksum event message 3 17 to 3 20 base line number B 7 base records 1 2 6 30 basic rate interface BRI digital subscriber loops DSLs 6 28 Bay Networks anonymous FTP file server 8 3 CompuServe forum xvi customer support xvi Home Page on World Wide Web xvii InfoFACTS service xvii publications ordering xix Technical Response Center xvii BCN circuit breaker 3 2 bipolar violations A 36 bisynchronous Packet Capture B 8 B 50 blew fuse 3 2 BOFL breath of life errors 3 17 to 3 18 Index 1 boot failure 3 3 image See router software image PROMs 3 6 bouncing MAC addresses 6 11 bridge ID 6 4 buffers allocating for Packet Capture B 10 problem 3 12 C cables 4 4 call request number 6 23 cannot find file message 7 2 carrier loss 5 8 case sensitivity 1 17 cells 5 2 Chameleon 7 2 CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol 6 29 check sequence checksum error 5 8 checksum error 5 8 circuit breaker 3 2 circuit down 5 14 clearlog command 1 5 clipped frames 5 10 clock settings internal 5 23 clock speed does not match other ports event message 5 23 clocking MCT1 5 18 CN circuit breaker 3 2 commands arp a 7 8 b
25. b Check the slave site s routing table for the routes it learned from the master site Do the same when the backup line comes up 6 24 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Refer to one of the following sections if it applies to the problem Master Cannot Connect to Slave Troubleshooting RS232 Raise DTR Dial Unbalanced Troubleshooting V 35 Raise DTR Dial Balanced Troubleshooting ISDN BRI and PRI Master Cannot Connect to Slave In a dial backup application if the master side cannot make the connection to the slave side do the following 1 2 3 4 Make sure the configuration file is correct If the connection is V 25bis check the log for the CRN Try reversing the master and slave Make sure that you enabled BOFL on the primary link If you can establish this connection recheck the configuration of the modem and router Troubleshooting RS232 Raise DTR Dial Unbalanced If DTR is up on the backup circuit the master end causing the backup modem to dial even though the primary line is up do the following 1 Verify whether the modem is sending a DSR data set ready signal to the router interface in the on state positive voltage when the local and remote modems are not connected If it is configure the modem for DSR to follow CD Carrier Detect or configure DSR to be in the off state until the modem receives a DTR data terminal ready signal Unfortunat
26. it copies them to a single file Therefore if you choose both packet directions and set one of these parameters Receive Trigger or Transmit Trigger to 1 you must set the other parameter to 1 If you fail to do this Packet Capture may write over the oldest packets regardless of whether an interface received or transmitted them If you want Packet Capture to terminate when it matches data to a string you specify use one of the following options e 2 to terminate when data matches the Filter 1 Match parameter setting B 43 Troubleshooting Routers Filter Parameters e 3 to terminate when data matches the Filter 2 Match parameter setting If you set the Packet Capture Receive Trigger to 2 or 3 it terminates upon matching data to either filter If you do not want Packet Capture to terminate automatically use the default option 4 The filter parameters described in this section are as follows e Type e Offset e Reference e Size e Match Group Parameters Type Packet Capture supports four Type parameters The MIB information is as follows oe igs Attribute Name aa MIB Object ID Incoming 1 wfPktCaptureRxFltr1Type 14 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 14 Incoming 2 wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Type 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 24 Outgoing 1 wfPktCaptureTxFltr1Type 19 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 19 Outgoing 2 wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Type 30 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 30 Default 3 Not used Options 11213 Function Sets the filter type
27. 06 31 679 DEBUG SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 50 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 11 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 12 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 13 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 14 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 15 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 16 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 17 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 18 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 19 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 20 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 21 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 22 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 23 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 24 6 mm dd yy 11 06 31 683 DEBUG SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 39 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 initialization complete Environment address 30 ea7ba0 Line record address 30f30dc4 Hardware map address 30f2da34 Initialization block 80006800 Receive descriptor ring 80001000 Transmit descriptor ring 80003c00 The following command displays the new port status 3 1 show dslel port DS1E1 Port Status Slot Conn State MTU Loopback Accept BERT Line Line FDL FDL State Loopback Mode Type Coding Type Addr 4 1 Up 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 5 2 Up 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 2 entries in table If you change the setting of the Line Type parameter from ESF extended super frame to SF super frame
28. 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 27 Outgoing 1 wfPktCaptureTxFltr1Size 22 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 22 Outgoing 2 wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Size 33 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 33 Default None Range Limited to 16 bytes Function Sets the length in bytes of the match field Instructions Set the parameter in question to equal the number of characters in the Match parameter setting Parameters Match Packet Capture supports four Match parameters The MIB information is as follows Packet Filter Attribute Attribute Name MIB Object ID Direction No No Incoming 1 wfPktCaptureRxFltr1Match 18 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 18 Incoming 2 wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Match 28 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 28 Outgoing 1 wfPktCaptureTxFltr Match 23 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 23 Outgoing 2 wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Match 34 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 34 Default None Range Any hexadecimal number or character string Function Sets the hexadecimal number or character string to compare with the packet to test for a match B 47 Troubleshooting Routers Instructions Enter any hexadecimal number or character string up to 16 characters Parameters Group Packet Capture supports two Group parameters one for incoming packets and the other for outgoing packets The MIB information is as follows packet Attribute Name Attribute MIB Object ID irection No Incoming wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Group 29 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 29 Outgoing wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Group 35 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1
29. 167 mm dd yy 11 48 39 955 INFO 2 CSMACD 9 Service initializing 168 mm dd yy 11 48 39 994 INFO 2 CSMACD 11 Connector XCVR1 enabled 169 mm dd yy 11 48 39 998 DEBUG 2 CSMACD 18 Connector XCVR1 initialization complete Silicon revision 5 Environment address 304e1a00 Line record address 305390a4 Hardware map address 305c5ce4 Receive descriptor ring 80000800 Transmit descriptor ring 80000c00 Initialization block 80007000 A 9 Troubleshooting Routers Slot 3 is booting revision 9 00 of bn exe 176 mm dd yy 11 48 41 007 INFO 3 GAME rel 9 00 Fri Jul 28 17 12 26 EST 1995 11 Starting image The transceiver on Slot 2 Connector 1 does not have SQE signal quality error enabled It reports the absence of an SQE signal even though it does not need it 193 mm dd yy XCVR1 no SQE 11 48 45 018 WARN 2 CSMAC D 7 Connector Data Path elects the circuit control gate for Circuit 1 Each circuit must have a circuit control gate 195 mm dd yy 11 48 45 025 DEBUG 2 DP 23 Creating Circuit 1 soloist with line GH 0x4082 196 mm dd yy 11 48 45 025 DEBUG 2 GAME 23 SOLO 0x00401 election opening 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 197 mm dd yy 11 48 45 049 DEBUG 2 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00401 election WON 0x20000000 repl b0000009 30000000 198 mm dd yy 11 48 45 053 DEBU
30. 30dc4 Hardware map address 30f2da34 Initialization block 80006800 Receive descriptor ring 80001000 Transmit descriptor ring 80003c00 8 mm dd yy 10 38 39 367 DEBUG SLOT 4 PCAP Code 67 interface became local line 10904101 1 D intf gate spawned line 1090410 9 mm dd yy 10 38 39 371 wait_state line 10904101 EBUG SLOT 4 PCAP Code 65 10 mm dd yy 10 38 44 351 DEBUG SLOT 5 DP Code 67 Missing Circuit Options record cct 3 DP gate rev d LINE message for cct 3 11 mm dd yy 10 38 44 355 DEBUG SLOT 5 DP Code 23 Creating Circuit 3 soloist with line GH 0xb381 12 mm dd yy 10 38 44 355 DEBUG SLOT 5 GAME Code 23 SOLO 0x00403 election opening 3c000000 3c000000 3c000000 vote 00000000 13 mm dd yy 10 38 44 386 DEBUG SLOT 5 GAME Code 97 SOLO 0x00403 election WON 0x04000000 repl bc000009 3c000000 SOLO 0x00403 election CLOSING 3c000000 3c000000 3c000000 vote 00000000 14 mm dd yy 10 38 44 390 INFO SLOT 5 ARP Code 1 Service is up on circuit 3 The following command displays the new port status 3 1 show dslel port DS1E1 Port Status Slot Conn State MTU Loopback Accept BERT Line Line FDL FDL State Loopback Mode Type Coding Type Addr 4 1 Up 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 5 2 Up 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 2 entries in table If you access the Line Tests option and send the FDL Line Loop CI
31. 31 for Transmit Filter 2 31 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Offset attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command lt value gt is any number up to the number of bytes in the packet Refer to the media you are filtering in the section Media Specific Instructions and Examples later in this appendix for detailed instructions Specifying the Number of Bytes Enter the following Technician Interface command to specify the number of bytes to compare with the string set wfPktCaptureEntry lt attribute _no gt lt line_no gt lt value gt commit lt attribute_no gt is e 17 for Receive Filter 1 17 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Size attribute e 27 for Receive Filter 2 27 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Size attribute B 23 Troubleshooting Routers e 22 for Transmit Filter 1 22 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFltr1 Size attribute e 33 for Transmit Filter 2 33 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Size attribute lt lin _no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command lt value gt equals the number of characters in the Match param
32. 35 Default 1 OR Options 1 OR 2 AND Function Determines whether Packet Capture copies a packet if it matches either filter or both filters Packet Capture uses this parameter only if you configure both capture filters associated with a single direction Instructions Use one of the following settings for each packet direction e 1 if you want Packet Capture to copy a packet if it matches either Filter 1 or Filter 2 e 2if you want Packet Capture to copy a packet only if it matches both Filter 1 and Filter 2 Media Specific Instructions and Examples The following sections provide instructions and show examples of packets with different media types They assume you set the number of bytes to copy from each packet to 64 by setting the wfPktCapturePktSize wfPktCaptureEntry 9 to 2 Each example uses the pktdump command to show a hexadecimal decoding of a frame or packet CSMA CD The CSMA CD Ethernet physical media has a data link filter offset of 14 bytes from the beginning of the MAC header This places the data link filter point at the next byte after the TYPE LENGTH field Outgoing packets may contain less than 60 bytes each because they go to Packet Capture without padding B 48 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture An example of a hexadecimal display of a CSMA CD frame follows P 0 0 0 0 Protocols Supp kt 10 mm dd yy 10 20 32 670 CSMACD 60 Rx 0000000 01 80 c2 00 00
33. 5 Procom file transfers to Bay Networks 8 2 prom command failure 1 4 PROM image compatibility 3 6 Proxy ARP 6 13 PTP Standard Packet Capture B 52 put command 8 3 PVC permanent virtual circuit not receiving 5 16 Q QENET Quad Ethernet 5 11 Quick Get tool 1 19 R Raise DTR Dial RS232 Unbalanced 6 25 V 35 Balanced 6 26 receiver lack of resource errors 5 8 reception statistics not changing 5 26 6 31 red fail LED 4 4 reliable message types A 5 remote loopback test 4 4 5 22 remote mode Configuration Manager 1 2 reset button 3 20 retrieving files from Bay Networks 8 2 RIP IP 6 14 IPX 6 18 router software image consistency among slots 3 7 names 3 6 routing tables 1 22 displaying on UNIX 6 8 memory shortage 3 12 RS232 Raise DTR Dial Unbalanced 6 25 run setpath command 1 19 S SAR segmentation and reassembly frame errors 5 3 save config command 1 3 1 17 saving causes memory card error 3 11 configuration changes 1 2 forwarding tables 1 22 output to disk option 1 5 Index 7 routing tables 1 22 the log 1 5 scope of a problem determining 2 1 to 2 3 Screen Builder tool 1 20 Screen Manager tool 1 20 script commands 1 19 SDLC Packet Capture B 52 secret CHAP 6 29 seed conflict 6 3 sending files to Bay Networks 8 2 serial number getting 8 1 Service Profile Identifiers SPIDs 6 28 SERVICES file 7 3 set command 1 2 1 3 1 16 seve
34. COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical 17 mm dd yy 10 31 Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Environment address S ine 1 LLC service withdrawn 33105 WARNING SLOT 5 DS1I Line 1 receiver timeout SLOT 5 DP died cct 3 FO SLOT 5 DS1I LC service withdrawn LOT 5 DP E_DOWN msg rcvd for line gate 0x400b4e3 on cct 3 Found dead line 0x400b4e3 at offset 0 cct 3 died killing circuit gate down 3c000000 COE 3 335124 INFO S on circuit 3 33 148 INFO S 33 164 DEBUG S gt bc000403 33 230 DEBUG S Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot 233 234 DEBUG S Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot 33 238 DEBUG S Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line 1 time_slot Line LOT 57 EP
35. Consideration of the workaround you are using may help you isolate the problem What end stations are involved Identifying the end stations involved can help you to determine the scope of the problem Research and consider the following additional causes e Traffic congestion Examine the statistics and the log to check for traffic congestion If you determine that traffic congestion is the problem consider redistributing traffic to relieve the congestion e A software anomaly Check the following documents for solutions to your problem Release Notes for Router Software Version 10 0 Release Notes for Site Manager Software Version 4 0 Look at the LEDs on the router s front and rear panels and refer to the event log and MIB statistics to answer the following questions Are the symptoms limited to e A single protocol on a single port If so the problem is most likely in the network layer or above Refer to Chapter 6 e Multiple protocols on a single port If so the problem is most likely in the physical or data link layer Refer to Chapters 4 and 5 e A single protocol on multiple ports within one slot If so the problem is most likely in the configuration of the network layer protocol Refer to Chapter 6 e Multiple protocols on multiple ports within one slot If so and if the same protocols are running OK in other slots the problem is most likely physical Refer to Chapter 4 2 2 Determining the
36. FDDI B 54 filenames B 30 filtering B 19 to B 25 B 44 to B 48 frame relay B 50 Frame Relay Switch and SMDS Switch B 51 getting a file B 30 to B 32 HSSI B 54 instance B 6 B 55 introduction 1 21 ISDN B 54 LAPB Link Access Procedure Balanced B 51 listing attributes B 35 overview B 1 parameters Buffer Size B 41 Capture B 40 Control B 40 Count B 42 Delete B 38 Direction B 42 Disable B 38 Filename B 39 Filter Size B 23 Group B 19 B 24 B 48 Line Number B 40 line number B 55 Match string B 19 B 21 B 47 Offset B 19 B 23 B 45 Packet Size B 11 B 41 Receive Filters B 19 Reference B 19 B 22 B 46 Size B 19 B 47 State B 39 Transmit Filters B 19 Trigger B 42 Type B 19 B 20 B 44 Passthru B 51 pktconv B 34 PPP B 51 PTP Standard B 52 Index 6 SDLC B 52 SMDS B 52 starting B 12 terminating B 12 Token Ring B 53 trigger B 17 X 25 B 53 PAP Password Authentication Protocol 6 29 parameters See attributes Passthru Packet Capture B 51 password lost 3 10 path control blocks 6 22 path is invalid message 7 3 path variables 7 3 payload loopback A 28 A 30 PC program counter 3 14 ping command 1 20 command failure 6 9 to 6 14 request failed 7 8 pktconv B 34 pktdump B 13 B 33 power problem 3 2 power supply LEDs 3 2 power surge 3 2 PPP lines loopback testing on 4 5 Packet Capture B 51 processors configuring for Packet Capture B
37. Filter Trace 0 Make sure that each configured network is in the up state and that the network address host address and encapsulation method are correct for each circuit To do this use the Statistics Manager to view the IPX Main Information Table screen or enter the following Technician Interface script command show ipx circuit 6 17 Troubleshooting Routers Example Sshow ipx circuit IPX Circuit Configuration Information ALL Circuit State Net Address Host Address Encaps Method 022 Up 0x2E000011 0x0000A20E08D4 LSAP E44 Up 0x2E008000 0x0000A2030079 Ethernet E32 Up 0x2E009000 0x0000A2035A5E LSAP E33 Up 0x2E010000 0x0000A2035A5F LSAP E42 Up 0x2E036000 0x0000A2030077 ovell 802 3 021 Up 0x2E060010 0x0000A20E08D3 LSAP 023 Up 0x2E060100 0x0000A20E08D5 LSAP 7 Circuits in table Note f an interface running IPX and Bridge receives a packet with an IPX encapsulation type that is different from that configured on the interface the Bridge sends it to other interfaces running Bridge IPX reads only the IPX packet encapsulation types that you configure it to read Therefore you must be careful when configuring the packet encapsulation types in an IPX network 4 If you configured the router to run RIP make sure that IPX RIP is up on the circuits in question To do this use the Statistics Manager to view the IPX RIP Interface Table screen or enter the following Technician Interface script comm
38. LOT 5 DP LOT 5 GAM a LOT 5 DS1 Nou P WN EF Fs LOT 5 DS1 ry 8 Jz CODIAGRWNHEO N oO 2A LOT 5 DS1 ap 22 23 24 1 initialization complete 30675250 Line record address GI 1 1 T Code Code Code Code no_ACK 00000000 Code Code Code Code 4 23 22 41 Code 3 Code 2 84 50 50 50 307326ac A 29 Troubleshooting Routers Hardware map address 3072 784 Initialization block 80006c00 Receive descriptor ring 80002600 Transmit descriptor ring 80005200 18 mm dd yy 10 31 58 218 DEBUG SLOT 5 PCAP Code 67 interface became local line 10905102 intf gate spawned line 10905102 wait_state line 10905102 To disable the payload Loopback from Line Tests click on FDL Disable Payload FDL stands for Facility Data Link The loopback LED turns off on Port 1 in Slot 4 and the log displays the following messages 3 1 log fftwid 1 mm dd yy 10 38 29 007 INFO SLOT 3 TI Code 3 Log cleared 2 mm dd yy 10 38 39 239 INFO SLOT 2 IB Code 7 wfSnmp 3 0 set to 192 32 18 9 3 mm dd yy 10 38 39 297 INFO SLOT 2 IB Code 5 wfDslElActionEntry 5 905102 set to 6 4 mm dd yy 10 38 39 312 INFO SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 31 Connector COM1 Unscheduled FDL message received type Payload Loopback Deactivate 5 mm
39. Networks manuals which are on the CD ROM Using Technician Interface Software Using Technician Interface Scripts Managing Routers and BNX Platforms Event Messages for Routers and BNX Platforms The manuals associated with the software you are using XV Troubleshooting Routers Bay Networks Customer Support Bay Networks provides live telephone technical support to our distributors resellers and service contracted customers from two U S and three international support centers If you have purchased your Bay Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff of that distributor or reseller for assistance with installation configuration troubleshooting or integration issues Customers also have the option of purchasing direct support from Bay Networks through a variety of service programs The programs include priority access telephone support on site engineering assistance software subscription hardware replacement and other programs designed to protect your investment To purchase any of these support programs including PhonePlus for 24 hour telephone technical support call 1 800 2LANWAN Outside the U S and Canada call 408 764 1000 You can also receive information on support programs from your local Bay Networks field sales office or purchase Bay Networks support directly from your reseller Bay Networks provides several methods of receiving support and information o
40. PYG Transmitting b t Not REGENDI srsuinnsraininsiai a a a 5 16 Frame Relay Configured with LMI Invokes an Xoff State 2 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 16 Troubleshooting an MOTT COmnection scrcas 5 17 Troubleshooting a Synchronous ConnetUon oscursninesaismiaiinne i 5 19 Checking the Address Format Bay Networks Standard Only seese 5 21 Troubleshooting a Synchronous to X 21 Connection 2 ceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeestteeeeeees 5 21 Reception Errors Incrementing or Reception Count Not Incrementing Troubleshooting the Internal Clock Settings Lab Environments Only 5 23 Troubleshooting a Token Ring COnmectiOnt scccicceccceisctesscossencicasdsuesseeeedodenteunnesseaesania 5 24 Troubleshooting Other Data Link Prolocols sccccccic ua narninaniininais 5 26 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Troubleshooting Apple Talk P E E TOAT EE T EAR 6 2 Local Net Range Conflict Event bscsane PEIE E AE A EEA TA T 6 3 ZONE CONIO EVOM MESSAGE ainda a haana AER ANEA Ra 6 3 Static Configuration Conflict Event Message sissisota 6 4 IrouDES hooti SNE airna EAA A 6 4 Toupesnooung IP aansnnanna T E PE re ec 8 Troubleshooting Telnet FTP and TFTP E EES 6 8 PMO DOES PETWO reir iba hirinaki aa aea 6 9 Router Cannot Ping Another Local Device sssariasisrisainireiin 6 10 Router Cannot Ping Endstation but Can Ping Other Endstations on the Same SPOME six dics iccaia Sedu Scie oaicacene seuidscee Macieiane badd fac
41. Quick Get path to access them 4 Look at the values of the following attributes e wfTokenRingMadrSelect This shows the source of the MAC address boxwide 1 PROM 2 or configuration 3 e wfTokenRingSpeed This shows whether the speed is 4 Mbps 4194304 or 16 Mpbs 16777216 e wfTokenRingEarlyTokenRelease This shows whether Early Token Release is enabled 1 or disabled 2 It is valid only when the ring speed is 16 Mbps 5 25 Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting Other Data Link Protocols This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to a data link connection If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Troubleshoot a data link protocol not mentioned previously in this chapter as follows 1 Use the Events Manager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for the media in question The Technician Interface command is log fftwid e lt ENTITY gt s lt slot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from the HSSI entity running in Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eHSSI s3 s4 When specifying the lt ENTITY gt use uppercase letters Refer to Event Messages for Routers and BNX Platforms for a list of the entities Check the state of the media Check the values of the following statistics twice and compare them to determine whether the media is currently receiving and transmitting fr
42. Scope of a Problem A single protocol on multiple ports within all slots running that protocol If so the problem is most likely in the configuration of the network layer protocol Make sure you enabled the protocol and refer to Chapter 6 Multiple protocols on multiple ports within all slots in the router box If so the problem is most likely operational Refer to Chapter 3 Multiple routers If so the problem is most likely due to an external device Try to determine the origin of the problem 2 3 Chapter 3 Troubleshooting an Operational Problem This chapter describes how to solve problems with the basic operation of the hardware and software It assumes you have already determined the scope of your problem as described in Chapter 2 It includes the following sections e Damaged Router e Power Problem e Blown Fuse e LEDs Not Lit e Router Won t Boot e Checking the Boot PROMs e Making Sure the Router Software Image Is Correct for the Router ec Making Sure All Slots Use the Same Router Software Image and Configuration File e Lost Password e No Space Left on Memory Card e Memory or Buffer Problem e Bad Forward Checksum Errors cc Fault Message 3 1 Troubleshooting Routers Damaged Router If you detect physical damage to the router report the problem to the Bay Networks Technica
43. Verify the network addresses of the source and destination devices 3 If the node that did not respond is on a remote segment make sure that each router is correctly resolving the ARP address of the next device in the path 4 If the node that did not respond is on the local segment use the wifIpInterfaceEntry MIB object to verify the address configuration and interface ICMP counters Endstation Can Ping Devices on the Same Segment but Cannot Ping the Router If the endstation can ping other devices on the same segment but cannot ping the local interface of the router do the following 6 12 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem 1 Compare the endstation s interface number network number and subnet mask to those of the router s interface The network and subnet numbers must be the same except that the endstation s subnet mask does not have to include as many octets as the router s Figure 6 1 Network 129 122 32 0 Interface 129 122 32 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Router Network 129 122 0 0 Interface 129 122 32 66 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Figure 6 1 Comparing the Endstation and Router Configurations The subnet mask allows the router to determine which traffic to route to each segment In Figure 6 1 the router s subnet mask must include the third octet if other subnets in the 129 122 network connect to the router Usually in such configurations you configure Proxy ARP Add
44. a warning appears in the log The operating system may need to allocate and free memory If the memory needed is not available an error occurs If errors occur after you start Packet Capture stop it and allocate a smaller buffer size 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 8 Packet Size wfPktCapturePktSize 9 None 1 32 bytes saved 2 64 bytes saved 144 4608 bytes saved Sets the number of bytes in 32 byte increments to be saved from a packet 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 9 B 41 Troubleshooting Routers Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Range Function Instructions MIB Object ID Trigger Parameters Direction wfPktCaptureDirection 10 1 Receive 1 Receive 2 Transmit 3 Both Sets the direction of Packet Capture copy received incoming packets transmitted outgoing packets or both 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 10 Count wfPktCaptureCount 11 Set by the Packet Capture code Based on size of buffer and number of bytes saved Indicates the number of packets copied to the Packet Capture file If you use the default setting of the Trigger parameter and the capture buffer wraps the count stops when it reaches a maximum value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 11 You use triggers to stop copying packets when an event occurs The trigger parameters consist of a receive trigger a
45. address corresponds to the DLSw Peers setting at the remote site Use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to inspect the reception messages and connection state changes 6 5 Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting IP This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to IP If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Troubleshoot IP as follows 1 Use the Events Manager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for IP running on the slots in question The Technician Interface command is log fftwid elP s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid elP s3 s4 Enter the following command to check the base records get wflpBase 0 The most important attributes are as follows e The State attribute shows whether IP is up 1 down 2 initializing 3 or not present 4 You cannot change this setting e The Create attribute reveals whether IP is created 1 or deleted not 1 e The Enable attribute reveals whether IP is enabled 1 or disabled 2 e The Forwarding attribute reveals whether IP forwards 1 or does not forward 2 datagrams received by it but not addressed to it Example get wfIpBase 0 wfIpBase wfIpBaseCreate 0 1 wfIpBase wfIpBaseEnable 0 1 wfIpBase wfIpBaseState 0 1 wfIpBase wfIpBaseForwarding 0 1 wfIpBase wfI
46. and PRI 6 27 to 6 29 K killing a gate 1 9 L lack of resource 5 8 5 12 LAN ID 6 4 LAPB Link Access Procedure Balanced Packet Capture B 51 late collisions 5 11 Launch Facility tool 1 20 Index 4 LBO line build out 5 17 LEDs ASN 3 4 failure to light 3 3 power supplies 3 2 red fail 4 4 line coding 5 17 line number B 6 B 7 B 40 B 55 line tests option A 28 line type 5 17 A 35 link state database 6 15 link state packets 6 22 list command 1 14 to 1 18 LLC logical link control reception ring overruns 5 12 loadmap command 3 13 to 3 16 no reply from slot s specified 3 14 local loopback test 4 4 5 21 memory 3 12 to 3 16 mode Configuration Manager 1 2 network range conflict 6 3 log AppleTalk filter 6 2 ATM filter 5 2 command 1 7 CSMACD Ethernet filter 5 6 data link protocol filter 5 26 DLSw filter 6 4 FDDI filter 5 11 filtering 1 6 to 1 8 Frame Relay filter 5 14 FTP filter 6 8 IP filter 6 6 IPX filter 6 16 MCT filter 5 17 modem interface filter 6 23 networking protocol filter 6 30 OSI filter 6 21 OSPF filter 6 15 PPP filter 6 23 saving to an ASCII file 1 5 switched access services 6 24 6 27 synchronous filter 5 19 Telnet filter 6 8 TFTP filter 6 8 Token Ring filter 5 24 logical line number B 7 loopback test 4 4 5 21 loss of carrier errors 5 8 lost password 3 10 LSP ID 6 22 MAC addresses alternating 6 11 source 5 25 mas
47. apply for interoperability purposes Licensee must notify Bay Networks in writing of any such intended examination of the Software and Bay Networks may provide review and assistance Notwithstanding any foregoing terms to the contrary if licensee licenses the Bay Networks product Site Manager licensee may duplicate and install the Site Manager product as specified in the Documentation This right is granted solely as necessary for use of Site Manager on hardware installed with licensee s network This license will automatically terminate upon improper handling of Software such as by disclosure or Bay Networks may terminate this license by written notice to licensee if licensee fails to comply with any of the material provisions of this license and fails to cure such failure within thirty 30 days after the receipt of written notice from Bay Networks Upon termination of this license licensee shall discontinue all use of the Software and return the Software and Documentation including all copies to Bay Networks Licensee s obligations under this license shall survive expiration or termination of this license Bay Networks Inc 4401 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 8 Federal Street Billerica MA 01821 Contents Troubleshooting Routers About This Guide AUC Mot AC EPET EA E T YEA AAIEN AAAA AFTE A T YEN EEE TE T E TTE XV Bere VU GUN saraa a Ea Wael eineecacel ee eraaiueeed XV Bay Networks Customer Suppa xt sec
48. bit map accordingly 314 mm dd yy 11 48 52 689 DEBUG 2 NVFS 63 NVFS manager is opening file bn exe for reading 316 mm dd yy 11 48 53 229 DEBUG 3 LOADER 30 Image at exe loaded successfully from 2 bn exe 321 mm dd yy 11 48 53 256 DEBUG 3 LOADER 15 Loader starting application at exe address 0x304bc3c0 gate id 0x00071 322 mm dd yy 11 48 53 260 DEBUG 2 TFTP 16 Subsystem transitioned to READY state Client initialized 323 mm dd yy 11 48 53 283 INFO 3 APPLETALK 4 Protocol initializing 324 mm dd yy 11 48 53 369 DEBUG 3 GAME 23 SOLO 0x000a5 election opening 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 325 mm dd yy 11 48 53 381 DEBUG 3 GAME 97 SOLO 0x000a5 election WON 0x10000000 repl b0000009 30000000 SOLO 0x000a5 election CLOSING 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 326 mm dd yy 11 48 53 396 DEBUG 3 GAME 97 SOLO 0x000a5 election CLOSED 0x10000000 repl b0000009 30000000 327 mm dd yy 11 48 53 404 DEBUG 3 APPLETALK 43 at_rtm_self_map old 00000072 new 90000072 328 mm dd yy 11 48 53 416 DEBUG 3 APPLETALK 43 at_mib_solo_chg BECAME LOCAL old 000000a5 new 900000a5 at_rtm_self_chg old 00000072 new 90000072 The following log messages show what happens when you use the Configuration Manager in dynamic mode to create TCP and Telnet The subsequent li
49. bytes of available free space and 1000 bytes of contiguous free space all of its free space is available for storing files If you store a file that is 100 bytes the number of bytes of available free space and contiguous free space each becomes 900 bytes If you delete the file and display the directory the display shows 1000 bytes of available free space but only 900 bytes of contiguous free space The 100 byte file remains on the memory card even though you deleted it Thus only 900 bytes remain for storing additional files until you compact the existing files Memory or Buffer Problem The router may have a memory or buffer problem if the log shows an out of resources or memalloc memory allocation error The router separates memory into these two types e The router reserves global memory for all buffers These buffers store all incoming and outgoing traffic e The router reserves local memory for the router software image the routing tables and the forwarding tables The router software image includes both the operating system and executable software modules Thus the amount of local memory available determines the maximum number of entries in a forwarding or routing table If the router has a shortage of local memory and an excess of global memory you can use the configuration parameters in the Configuration Manager s Administration menu to increase available local memo
50. cable from the port of the router reporting the errors and plug it into another port on the router that you know works correctly If the synchronous errors persist verify that you properly configured the newly tested port test the cable and test the local CSU DSU If the errors go away compare the newly tested port s configuration to that of the original port If the port configurations are the same try swapping the link module that has the original port with a new link module e Or connect the port of the router reporting the errors to another CSU DSU and monitor the line statistics If the errors persist try another cable If errors continue to persist try swapping the link module with a new one 5 22 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem Troubleshooting the Internal Clock Settings Lab Environments Only If you are using crossover cables to connect to two back to back routers in a lab environment make sure all interfaces on a given slot have consistent clock source and speed settings Messages like the following appear if two interfaces on a slot have inconsistent clock settings Warning Sync Code 40 Connector COM2 clock speed does not match other ports Note All internally clocked ports on a slot change to the last configured internal clock speed when you boot save a dynamic configuration change or enter the config command Check the clock source and speed settings as follows 1 Enter the
51. dd yy 10 38 39 355 DEBUG SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 50 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 1 6 mm dd yy 10 38 39 359 DEBUG SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 50 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 2 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 3 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 4 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 5 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 6 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 7 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 8 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 9 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 10 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 11 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 12 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 13 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 14 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 15 7 mm dd yy 10 38 39 363 DEBUG SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 50 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 16 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 17 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 18 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 19 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 20 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 21 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 22 A 30 Reading the Event Log Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 23 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 24 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 initialization complete Environment address 30ea8ba0 Line record address 30f
52. default zone should not be in the zone list The message Default Zone Seed Conflict appears if the default zone fails to match that of the seed router Troubleshooting Routers Static Configuration Conflict Event Message The node number associated with the interface is already in use by another node on the same segment Set the node number of the interface to 0 so that it will configure dynamically or define a unique node ID Troubleshooting DLSw This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to DLSw If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem You can turn on extended DLSw Data Link Switch log messages by setting the Max Sessions attribute under wfDls to 1111 We recommend that you turn off extended DLSw messages when you finish examining the log to test or troubleshoot a DLSw connection Troubleshoot DLSw as follows 1 Use the Events Manager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for DLSw The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eDLS s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eDLS s3 s4 2 Make sure that the DLSw MTU size matches the synchronous line MTU size Unnecessary packet fragmentation can occur when these settings do not match 3 Use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to inspect the global source route bridge setti
53. disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Trademarks of Bay Networks Inc ACE AFN BCN BLN BN CN FRE LN Optivity SynOptics SynOptics Communications Wellfleet and the Wellfleet logo are registered trademarks and AN ANH ASN BaySIS BayStack BCNX BLNX BNX EZ Internetwork EZ LAN FN PathMan PhonePlus PPX Quick2Config RouterMan SPEX Bay Networks Bay Networks Press the Bay Networks logo and the SynOptics logo are trademarks of Bay Networks Inc Third Party Trademarks All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Bay Networks Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Bay Networks Inc does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product are Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such po
54. displays the value of an object e set lt object gt lt attribute gt lt instance gt lt value gt changes the value of an object You enter set commands to make changes to configuration settings Note the space between the lt instance gt and the lt value gt e commit changes the value in volatile memory Enter the commit command after issuing set commands or they will not work When you use the Configuration Manager to make changes and select File gt Save the router automatically changes the value in volatile memory Introduction Remember to save the changes to a file on the router s memory card or floppy disk before rebooting You can do this with the Configuration Manager or the Technician Interface When using the Configuration Manager in dynamic mode select File gt Save When using the Technician Interface enter the following command save config lt volume gt lt filename gt If you do not specify a lt volume gt the router saves the file to the default volume Caution The Technician Interface does not perform any error checking when you change the value of a MIB attribute Whenever possible use Site Manager to change configuration settings If you do use the Technician Interface refer to the appropriate mib file to determine which values are legal Illegal values can disrupt the operation of the router Caution Any time you change the setting of a base protocol object the modified protocol may restart
55. extended super frame ESF line type mode only Make sure that the clocking is set to Port1 Ext Loop or Port2 Ext Loop These settings are equivalent to Sync External The internal clocking in the MCT1 link module is the same as the internal clocking of the T1 link module The MCT1 Slave and Loop settings are equivalent to the T1 master clock in the T1 link module Make sure the CRC16 cyclic redundancy check or CRC32 match the carrier s specifications Make sure that the Inter Frame Time Fill matches idles OxFF or flags 0x7E with the remote end of the link Check the events from the entity DS1E1 multichannel T1 E1 driver service to view the MCT1 log entry events MCT uses the wfDs1E1 MIB entries Therefore the entity name associated with MCT1 is DS1E1 not MCT1 MCT uses the wfSyncEntry object T1 uses the wfLogicalLineEntry object Enter the Technician Interface loadmap lt slot_no gt command and make sure that the software loaded the munich exe and mctlel exe files If it did not use the Image Builder to add them to the router software image and transfer the image to the memory card 5 18 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem Troubleshooting a Synchronous Connection This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to a synchronous connection If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Troubleshoot a synchronous connection as follows 1
56. following command to display the clock source setting for each slot and connector in the router get wfSyncEntry 13 The display shows the settings for all synchronous ports on all slots in the following format wfSyncEntry wfSyncClkSource lt slot_no gt lt connector_no gt lt setting gt The setting is 1 for clocking within the router or 2 for clocking from an external source 2 If any of the clock source settings are 1 for internal clocking enter the following command to check the clock speed get wfSyncEntry 14 The console displays the transmission and reception clock speed for each slot and connector on the router All ports configured for internal clocking within a slot use the clock speed of the port most recently configured for internal clocking The clock speed is valid only for the slots that are set for internal clocking The clock speeds you can set are 1200 1200b 2401 2400b 4807 4800b 7204 7200b 9615 9600b 19230 19200b 32051 32000b 38461 38400b 56818 56k 64102 64k 125000 125k 227272 230k 416666 420k 625000 625k 833333 833k 1250000 1mb 2500000 2mb and 5000000 5mb 5 23 Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting a Token Ring Connection This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to a Token Ring connection If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Troubleshoot Token Ring as follows 1
57. log fftwid eMCT1 s3 s4 Note Appendix A includes instructions on reading MCT1 log messages 2 Check the following MCT1 MIB entries by entering the following Technician Interface commands get wfDrivers 14 0 Or use the following Quick Get path to this attribute wfSoftwareConfig gt wfDrivers gt wfMunichLoad get wfLinkModules 17 0 Or use the following Quick Get path to this attribute wfSoftwareConfig gt wfLinkModules gt wfMCT1E1Load Make sure that the Line Type and Line Coding supplied by the T1 provider match the associated settings in the MCT1 configuration Make sure the DSOs Directory Service 0 channels match at both the router and the central office Watch the LEDs in the back of the MCT1 If the Sync LED keeps flashing the LBO line build out impedance or resistance on a line is not in sync Ask the T1 carrier if you should set it to long haul or short haul and configure the LBO parameter accordingly 5 17 Troubleshooting Routers 10 11 12 The Sync LED stays on when the framer is in sync with the carrier s clock Make sure that you set the LBO appropriately For example 0 0 dB is short haul up to 133 ft Use the MCT1 built in BERT Bit Error Rate Test and Line loop up loop down and payload loopbacks for troubleshooting This feature is available only with Site Manager in dynamic mode Note that only one port can be in BERT mode at a time Payload loopbacks are available in
58. media has a data link filter offset of 13 bytes This places the data link filter point at the DSAP byte Packet Capture does not receive all frames from the FDDI because the hardware handles some frames An example of a hexadecimal display of an FDDI frame follows Pkt 10 04 18 94 12 59 04 017 FDDI 51 Rx 00000000 50 80 01 43 00 00 00 00 00 c5 00 00 30 42 42 03 00000010 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 00 00 00000020 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 80 08 00 00 14 00 02 00000030 00 Of 00 b7 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The HSSI physical media works exactly the same way as the previously described SYNC medium except for the HPTP STANDARD protocol HPTP has a data link filter offset of 14 bytes from the beginning of the packet This places the data link filter point at the first byte after the Length Type field The HPTP packets do not have an address or control field An example of a hexadecimal display of an HSSI frame follows Pkt 7 04 21 94 09 17 53 957 HPTP 52 Rx 00000000 01 80 c2 00 00 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 26 42 42 00000010 03 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 00 00000020 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 80 01 00 00 14 00 00000030 02 00 Of 00 6b Od 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The ISDN B Channel works the same way as described in the SYNC section for each of the protocols supported over ISDN The ISDN D Channel currently does not have a special data link offset If you configure a da
59. number of frames dropped Display these attributes again after 1 minute and compare the values to determine which errors are currently occurring The wfAtmVclRcvCrcErrs attribute shows the number of errors due to line noise which may be caused by defective fiber The wfAtmVclRcvMaxLenExceedErrs attribute shows the number of packets coming from the ATM code and handed to the driver for transmission that exceeded the maximum MTU maximum transfer unit configured on the VCL Check the configuration of the MTU and consider increasing the maximum MTU The wfAtmVclRevInvalidLenErrs attribute shows the number of SAR segmentation and reassembly frames containing an error in length after PDU protocol data unit re assembly It can indicate that the router is dropping frames Check the dropped frame statistics Check the path of the cells through the network to determine the location of the dropped cells Use the Technician Interface to display the attributes associated with the wfAtmAlIcCopDataPath object The Quick Get path to this group is wfLine gt wfAtmInterfaceGroup gt wfAtmLinkModule gt wfAtmAlcCopDataPathTable These attributes contain information on the ATM co processor buffer utilization the number of cells received and transmitted and the number of dropped clipped frames The count of each cell type received and transmitted is always 0 the other counts are for future use Display these attributes again after 1 minute and
60. packet capture configurations The circuit is on a CSMA CD interface The line number is 102101 Example 1 This example sets the following configuration 1024 bytes of memory reserved for Packet Capture 64 bytes of each packet to be saved Incoming and outgoing packets to be saved No filters and No triggers The instructions are as follows 1 Reserve 1024 bytes of memory set wfPktCaptureEntry 8 102101 1 8 represents the wfPktCaptureBufSize attribute Save 64 bytes of each packet set wfPktCaptureEntry 9 102101 2 9 represents the wfPktCapturePktSize attribute Save incoming and outgoing packets set wfPktcaptureEntry 10 102101 3 commit 10 represents the wfPktCaptureDirection attribute B 25 Troubleshooting Routers Example 2 This example starts and stops Packet Capture The instructions are as follows 1 Start Packet Capture set wfPktCaptureEntry 5 102101 1 commit 5 represents the wfPktCaptureControl attribute 2 Stop Packet Capture set wfPktCaptureEntry 5 102101 2 commit Example 3 This example configures a termination trigger for each direction The instructions are as follows 1 Set a trigger for incoming packets set wfPktCaptureEntry 12 102101 1 12 represents the wfPktCaptureRxTrigger attribute Set a trigger for outgoing packets set wfPktCaptureEntry 13 102101 1 commit 13 represents the wfPktCaptureTxTrigger attribute Example 4 This example specifies that Packet Capture copy o
61. scale of 1 to 10 You assign each attribute a unique number called an attribute identifier For example you use 1 for list price 2 for year of manufacture 3 for make etc To access the attribute reputation you can specify the object by name Car or by identifier 2 and the attribute by name Reputation or number 8 in the format Car Reputation or 2 8 Whenever the number of values of an object is limited you assign code numbers to the values For example for the Color attribute of the object House you use 1 for white 2 for green 3 for brown etc Until now we ve been discussing houses and cars in abstractions not physical manifestations For example houses have lot sizes and colors but a particular house you have seen has a 10 000 square foot lot and is blue To reference particular houses and cars you select attributes that by themselves uniquely identify them The town street and house number uniquely identify a house but the town alone or the color does not The dealer year make and model uniquely identify a car but the list price alone does not So you select the format House Street Town to uniquely identify houses and the format Dealer Year Make Model to uniquely identify cars The MIB name for a collection of attribute values that you use to identify the physical manifestation of an object is an instance Thus House Street Town is the instance format of the object
62. set the driver configuration to 2 the software disregards the DSR lead Reception Errors Incrementing or Reception Count Not Incrementing Conduct a local loopback test of the local CSU channel service unit or DSU digital service unit During the loopback test check the transmission and reception statistics If the transmission and reception statistics increment equally without errors conduct a loopback test of the remote CSU DSU if at least one of the following is true e You configured the synchronous line as standard with explicit addressing 5 21 Troubleshooting Routers e You configured the DTE DCE Data Terminal Equipment Data Communication Equipment with promiscuous mode turned on Caution Do not do loopback testing on a synchronous port during production network time if the bridge is operating on that port The remote loopback test allows data to leave the router cross the synchronous circuit to the remote CSU DSU and come back to the router If the transmission and reception statistics increment without errors perform the local and remote loopback tests at the remote side If the local loopback test did not cause any error count to be incremented but the remote loopback test did request that the carrier test the line and remote CSU DSU If the local loopback test causes the error counts to continue to increment complete one of the following procedures in order to isolate the problem e Disconnect the
63. the associated PVC e Determine whether the switch can loop back any data Frame Relay Configured with LMI Invokes an Xoff State If a Frame Relay switch exceeds buffer thresholds and sends an R bit the router invokes an Xoff state Xoff is equivalent to a disabled VC The router brings down the DLCI VC that received the R bit and the DLCI VC goes away If the DLCI that received the R bit is a Direct Mode DLCI the router also disables all the upper layer protocols associated with the DLCI If the DLCI is in Group Mode the upper layer protocols do not stop In this case the protocols may reroute You cannot configure the router to ignore an Xoff state The software supports FECNs and BECNS in place of Xoff If IP is available use the Ping trace option to determine which Frame Relay node is down 5 16 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem Troubleshooting an MCT1 Connection This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to an MCT1 multichannel T1 connection If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem A includes instructions on reading MCT1 log messages Do the following if the connection is MCT1 1 Filter the log to display only messages from the MCT1 entity running on the slots experiencing the problem The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eMCT1 s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter
64. the Slot That Sent a Bad Backplane BOFL Packet cceceeeeeereees 3 18 Finding the Slot That Sent a Bad Packet That Was Not a BOFL Packet 3 19 Fai Mese aE E dotted ETAN 3 20 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting a Physical Media Problem Making Sure the Link Module IS Work 1i3cceccaceriascccestirassizectsccccvewetscsqecessteridaniannivened 4 1 Determining the Media Specifie Stale o ccccc ccccccsuisscascnassscascnnannccactenesseecicausaacassuaaenssa snares 4 2 Troubleshooting ihe Cable Connection aiisaccsidsssenabaiaiacinrotiiaaei aadiceriessiad ihe deems 4 4 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem Troubleshooting an ATM Connection einen ees dential Mudmatonaas stews cede 5 2 vi Dopped PANES ccssasistcummecusinaiienn auamaniicrennauamniaanaeunead 5 4 re Ble leg zes Fed MESSA iiini dennie naiai eiaa 5 4 Upper Layer Protocols Failing to Pass Packets iiiriississrisiininuseidieiiaiiianiiii 5 5 Troubleshooting an Ethernet COnnecuon cui can cass awedandiaals 5 6 Troubleshooting an FDDI Connection Serr tre scouts ere ere ere a511 Troubleshooting a Frame Relay Connection icccsceiicessscrsdscccnscaseniccesieatinengeccesienninass 5 14 Log messages from Frame Relay Indicate Circuit Is Down cece eeeteeeeeeenees 5 14 Frame Relay Switch Keeps Marking the Circuit as DOWN cceeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeees 5 15 Frame Relay Circuit Up but Protocol Data Is Not Transmitting ceeeee 5 15
65. the following messages appear 3 1 s wfDslElConfigEntry wfDslE1lConfigLineType 904101 3 commit 3 1 s wfDslElConfigEntry wfDslE1lConfigLineType 905102 3 commit A 34 Reading the Event Log The following command displays the new port status 3 1 show dslel port DS1E1 Port Status Slot Conn State MTU Loopback Accept BERT Line Line FDL FDL State Loopback Mode Type Coding Type Addr 4 1 Yel Alarm 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 5 2 Yel Alarm 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 2 entries in table 3 1 DS1E1 Port Status Slot Conn State MTU Loopback Accept BERT Line Line FDL FDL State Loopback Mode Type Coding Type Addr 4 1 Yel Alarm 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 5 2 Up 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 2 entries in table If you set the port line type to AMI alternate mark inversion the following messages appear 7 mm dd yy 11 25 03 226 WARNING SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 14 Connector COM1 Loss of signal failure 8 mm dd yy 11 25 03 226 INFO SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 22 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 LLC service withdrawn 9 mm dd yy 11 25 03 335 INFO SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 24 Connector COM1 B8ZS code received on port configured for AMI 10 mm dd yy 11 25 05 343 WARNING SLOT 5 DS1E1l Code 17 Connector COM2 Remote alarm indication failure The following command displays the new port status 3 1
66. the name of the object When using the Technician Interface it is easier to enter the object names Example Trst wfCSMACDEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 1 1 wfCSMACDAutoNegEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 16 1 1 wfFddiEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 4 1 When you enter the list command the numbers to the right of the equal sign are the object identifiers not the values Dots separate each object The objects in the example belong to a hierarchy of objects identified by 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 Troubleshooting Routers You can view all the attribute names and numeric identifiers of an object by entering the Technician Interface list lt object gt command Example list wfCSMACDEntry wf CSMACDDelete 1 wfCSMACDEnable 2 wfCSMACDState 3 wf CSMACDSlot 4 wf CSMACDConnector 5 wf CSMACDCct 6 wfCSMACDBofl 7 wfCSMACDBoflTmo 8 wf CSMACDMtu 9 wfCSMACDMadr 10 Note Do not confuse object or attribute identifiers with values Identifiers are numbers you can use in place of attribute names For example the object identifier of wf CSMACDMadr the media access control address is 10 When entering the object and attribute in Technician Interface commands to display or change a value you specify the object by name wfCSMACDMadr or object number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 1 1 and the attribute by name wfCSMACDMadr or number 10 Thus you can specify the object attribute in any one of the following ways The first
67. the router interface has a path to the PC Verify that the segment on which the PC is located does not contain duplicate IP addresses Issue the Technician Interface get wflpInterfaceEntry 45 command to display the number of ICMP echo requests the interface received for that IP address After the PC can ping the local router interface and receive a response ping another interface on the router to determine whether the end node knows how to get off the local network If this test fails check the subnet mask and default gateway definitions on the PC Cannot Connect Site Manager Running on a UNIX Workstation Troubleshoot Site Manager connectivity failures on a UNIX workstation as follows 1 2 Log into an account from which you can run Site Manager Use the command line interface of the workstation to ping the local router interface If this fails and the number of transmitted requests and reply counters fail to increment the workstation did not receive a response to the ARP request for the router s MAC address Do the following a b Check the configured address of the workstation and its subnet mask Try to use the command line interface to ping other stations on the LAN Try to ping the router port from other PCs or workstations on the LAN 7 7 Troubleshooting Routers If the ping attempts fail but the number of transmitted requests increments the workstation has a path to the requested address b
68. to 0 The data link filter works the same way that the MAC filter works The X 25 protocol uses the hardware s link layer capabilities This means that Packet Capture receives only the frame s Layer 3 packet layer data An example of a hexadecimal display of an X 25 packet follows Pkt 8 04 26 94 09 00 42 103 X25 47 Rx 00000000 10 01 e2 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00000010 le aa aa 03 00 00 a2 80 ff 00 00 a2 02 c9 b6 00 00000020 00 a2 02 c9 b6 81 02 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 38 10 The Token Ring physical media has a data link filter offset of 14 bytes plus the RIF routing information field field if a RIF is present This places the data link filter point at the DSAP destination service access point byte Packet Capture receives only LLC frames from the Token Ring It does not receive the Access Control and Frame Control bytes at the beginning of each packet Packet Capture inserts the hexadecimal value 1040 at the beginning of each packet for compatibility and possible future use An example of a hexadecimal display of a Token Ring frame follows 4s kt 10 04 18 94 12 58 58 885 TOKEN 52 Rx 00000000 10 40 cO 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 c5 00 00 30 42 42 00000010 03 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 00 00000020 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 80 06 00 00 14 00 00000030 02 00 Of 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 B 53 Troubleshooting Routers FDDI HSSI ISDN The FDDI physical
69. to ATM do the following 1 Find the message indicating that Data Path created a gate for the virtual circuit The message looks like this 316 mm dd yy 14 57 42 417 D EBUG SLOT 3 DP Code 23 Adding VC gate w GH 0x627e to cct 3 The abbreviation w GH stands for with gate handle A gate handle is the logical address of a process Check the subsequent log messages to make sure that the operating system did not subsequently kill this gate 5 5 Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting an Ethernet Connection This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to an Ethernet connection If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Troubleshoot as follows 1 Filter the log to display only messages from the CSMACD entity running on the slots experiencing the problem The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eCSMACD s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eCSMACD s3 s4 If only a single port on the slot is reporting errors try switching out the transceiver hub port the router is connected to or the actual cable that connects the router to the transceiver cable or twisted pair connection If the problem persists verify the configuration of the Ethernet port Then switch the problem connection to another Ethernet port If the errors stop occurring you may have a bad Etherne
70. transferring Packet Capture files to a DOS PC or SPARCstation B 32 Xoff state 5 16 Y yellow fiber 4 5 YMODEM Packet Capture B 32 Z zone name conflict event message 6 3 Index 10
71. type while two IPX packet types register This is because two unique IPX networks with different packet encapsulation types are on Circuit 1 217 mm dd yy 1 48 45 494 DEB registered on cct 1 218 mm dd yy 1 48 45 518 DEB registered on cct 1 219 mm dd yy 1 48 45 537 DEB registered on cct 1 222 mm dd yy 1 48 45 592 DEB registered on cct 1 225 mm dd yy 1 48 45 623 DEB registered on cct 1 UG 2 DP 34 ISAP 0x30800 UG 2 DP 34 ISAP 0x10800 UG 2 DP 34 ISAP 0x16003 UG 2 DP 34 ISAP 0x38137 UG 2 DP 34 ISAP 0x18137 Slot 3 successfully boots and is attempting to load the configuration file from Slot 2 227 mm dd yy 11 48 49 521 DEBUG became re connected starting Loader 228 mm dd yy 11 48 49 525 DEBUG starting service gate 0x000al 0x300a22 229 mm dd yy 11 48 49 529 DEBUG Client slot 3 type 2 230 mm dd yy 11 48 49 529 DEBUG Server slot 3 type 2 231 mm dd yy 11 48 49 537 DEBUG Client reply slot 2 type 2 232 mm dd yy 11 48 49 646 DEBUG starting service gate 0x00066 0x300416 233 mm dd yy 11 48 49 771 DEBUG starting service gate 0x00013 0x300954 234 mm dd yy 11 48 49 771 DEBUG 3 obtain config file 235 mm dd yy 11 48 49 787 DEBUG configuration from slot 2 236 mm dd yy 11 48 49 865 DEBUG configuration to slot 0x90000013 237 mm dd yy 11 48 49 869 DEBUG serving configuration to
72. type may be on the right side Verify the connection by looking at the connector number on the link module 3 Check the LEDs on the rear panel of the router The green transceiver light goes on when the cable is secure If you hot swapped a link module or reset the slot the associated red fail LED remains on until you run diagnostics on that slot This condition does not necessarily indicate a problem However if you run diagnostics on a slot and the red fail LED remains on for more than a few minutes call the Bay Networks Technical Response Center Caution Connect only cables that support hot swap to connectors that support hot swap Also connect only cables that do not support hot swap to connectors that do not Otherwise damage to the board may occur 4 If the state of the connector is down replace the cable Test whether the problem is the cable or the port by replacing it with a cable that you know is good Perform local and remote loopback tests during network downtime or on ports that are not in use Caution Do not do loopback testing during production network time if the bridge is operating on the port 4 4 Troubleshooting a Physical Media Problem You can also loop back PPP lines But if you configured them with a password you must configure them in promiscuous mode first If you are accessing a DTE DCE line with promiscuous mode off the port will not increment the reception statistics If the con
73. way is the best because you are less likely to make a typing error e wfCSMACDEntry 10 e wfCSMACDEntry wfCSMACDMadr e 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 1 1 wfCSMACDMadr e 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 1 1 10 Note The files that describe the MIB are in the mibs subdirectory The default UNIX directory path to the MIB files is ust wf mibs The default DOS directory path to the MIB files is wf mibs The files identify and describe each MIB attribute If the legal values of an attribute are finite the associated MIB lists them Use an editor to perform searches of objects that interest you Introduction You can view all the instances of an object configured on the router by entering the Technician Interface list instances lt object gt command Note Objects such as wflpxBase and wflIpBase that include scalar objects always have the single instance identifier 0 Example list instances wfCSMACDEntry inst_ids 1 1 1 2 10 1 10 2 The instance format of the wf CSMACDEntry object is slot connector In this example Connectors 1 and 2 in Slots 1 and 10 are the instances of the wfCSMACDEntry object To determine the format of an instance search for the name of the object in the associated mibs file until the specification of the object appears The INDEX field describes the format of the instance associated with that object Example This example shows that the slot and connector form the instance of all attributes of the objec
74. 0 The port uses the CTS clear to send pin signal to determine whether a modem is present 14 mm dd yy 13 07 26 031 INFO SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 22 Connector COM1 enable requested on cct 65535 The circuit number 65535 does not activate until data is waiting to transmit across the connection The FSM Finite State Machine messages indicate that communication between the modem and the router is occurring The first FSM message shows the state the router is currently in when the FSM Event that follows occurred 15 mm dd yy 13 07 26 591 DEBUG SLOT 2 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_WAIT_FOR_CTS 1 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_CTS_UP 5 isdn flags 0x1 16 mm dd yy 13 07 26 591 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 53 Connector COM1 CTS has come up SWSERV Code 46 The router believes a V 25bis modem is present because it detected a CTS signal The following message indicates that you configured the port for V 25bis rather than Raise DTR 17 mm dd yy 13 07 26 591 DEBUG SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 9 Connector COM1 modem present V 25bis mode 18 mm dd yy 13 07 26 591 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Line Mgr received line ready for line 1 19 mm dd yy 13 07 26 591 INFO SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 10 Sync Line 1 available for dial on demand pool 1 The router provides LLC service on the dial on demand port only after it detects a CTS signal 2
75. 0 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 80 07 00 00 14 00 00000030 02 00 Of 00 51 51 Of a3 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 B 15 Troubleshooting Routers Deleting a Packet Capture Instance You may want to delete all MIB information about a Packet Capture instance if you no longer intend to use it and you want to free the memory for other purposes To delete an instance enter the following command set wfPktCaptureEntry 1 lt ine_no gt 2 commit 1 represents the wfPktCaptureDelete attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command 2 represents the numeric code for delete Example Enter the following command to delete the Packet Capture instance identified by Line Number 202101 set wfPktCaptureEntry 1 202101 2 commit Using Optional Features The following sections describe how to use optional Packet Capture features e Configuring the Direction of the Packets to be Copied e Configuring a Termination Trigger e Assigning Filters 73 Configuration Examples 73 Configuring the Direction of the Packets to be Copied Note Jf Packet Capture is running and you change the configuration the change will not affect Packet Capture until you stop it and restart it Configuring the Direct
76. 0 mm dd yy 13 07 26 591 INFO SLOT 2 SYNC Code 11 Connector COM1 providing LLC1 service A 23 Troubleshooting Routers The router pings the remote side of the dial on demand link to provide data to transmit across the link and displays a data received message when it receives a response 21 mm dd yy 13 09 16 174 INFO SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 23 Data received for dial on demand circuit 2 22 mm dd yy 13 09 16 178 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWS Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_WAIT_DATA_OR_IND 2 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_DATA_AVAIL 7 isdn flags 0x9 23 mm dd yy 13 09 16 178 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 34 Connector COM1 DATA Available 24 mm dd yy 13 09 16 178 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWS SW Sent you are cc 2 message to line 1 The line is given a valid circuit number 2 in order to be activated 25 mm dd yy 13 09 16 193 INFO SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 7 Dial on demand circuit being established on line 1 rs RV Code 46 a RV Code 44 a1 The router forwards a call request number CRN to the V 25bis modem It uses the phone number configured in the Outgoing field of the circuit definition 26 mm dd yy 13 09 16 225 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 35 Connector COM1 Sent CRN cmd to T3053 In this example the cable connection to the modem is loose The router fails to receive a response from the modem indicating that it received the CRN The router e
77. 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 26 42 42 0000010 03 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 00 0000020 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 80 07 00 00 14 00 0000030 02 00 Of 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 orted By Synchronous T1 E1 and MCT1 The following sections identify the format and filter offsets of the protocols supported by the synchronous T1 E1 and MCT1 media and show examples of these packets ATM 73 Bisynchronous Frame Relay Frame Relay Switch and SMDS Switch LAPB 73 Passthru Ppp PTP STANDARD SDLC SMDS X25 B 49 Troubleshooting Routers ATM The ATM protocol currently does not have a special data link filter offset If you configure a data link filter set the offset to 0 The data link filter works the same way that the MAC filter works An example of a hexadecimal display of an ATM packet follows As kt 20 04 23 94 09 57 29 968 ATM 548 Tx 00000000 Oc 80 00 85 00 4b 02 18 03 cc 45 00 02 14 01 10 00000010 00 00 01 11 ed c9 64 00 00 01 64 ff ff ff 02 08 00000020 02 08 02 00 69 c8 02 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 cO 20 00000030 de 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 02 Bisynchronous The bisynchronous BISYNC protocol currently does not have a special data link filter If you configure a data link filter set the offset to 0 The data link filter works the same way that the MAC filter works The capture
78. 000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 118 mm dd yy 11 48 36 658 DEBUG 2 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00098 election CLOSED 0x20000000 repl b0000009 30000000 Each slot loads only the configured board drivers and protocols It queries the router software image and loads the necessary code onto the requesting FRE 122 mm dd yy 11 48 37 178 DEBUG 2 is opening file bn exe for reading 123 mm dd yy 11 48 37 217 DEBUG 2 qenet exe loaded successfully from 2 bn exe 124 mm dd yy 11 48 37 217 DEBUG 2 is closing file bn exe 125 mm dd yy 11 48 37 225 DEBUG 2 starting application qenet exe 127 mm dd yy 11 48 37 252 INFO 2 initializing QENET I O module is present NVFS 63 LOADER 30 NVFS 64 LOADER 15 MODULE 7 NVFS manager Image NVFS manager Loader address 0x30541a10 gate id 0x00045 Service IP loaded successfully and is initializing IP indicates that is in router mode rather than host only mode message 133 128 mm dd yy 11 48 38 018 DEBUG 2 LOADER 30 loaded successfully from 2 bn exe 129 mm dd yy 11 48 38 018 DEBUG 2 NVFS 64 is closing file bn exe 130 mm dd yy 11 48 38 049 DEBUG 2 LOADER 15 starting application ip exe address 0x304e9770 gate id 132 mm dd yy 11 48 38 080 INFO 2 IP 4 initializing 133 mm dd yy 11 48 38 092 DEBUG 2 IP 8 ode Router Imag
79. 000000 03 64 10 01 81 Passthru The Passthru PASS protocol currently does not have a special data link filter offset If you configure a data link filter set the offset to 0 The data link filter works the same way that the MAC filter works An example of a hexadecimal display of a Passthru packet follows Pkt 9 04 26 94 09 00 50 730 PASS 24 Tx 00000000 07 03 00 00 a2 02 c9 b6 00 00 a2 02 c9 b6 81 02 00000010 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 2a 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 PPP The PPP point to point Standard Protocol protocol currently does not have a special data link filter offset If you configure a data link filter set the offset to 0 The data link filter works the same way that the MAC filter works An example of a hexadecimal display of a PPP packet follows Pkt 9 04 18 94 12 58 45 551 PPP 39 Rx 00000000 03 02 01 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 00000010 Oc 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 80 02 00 00000020 00 14 00 02 00 Of 00 1d 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 B 51 Troubleshooting Routers PTP STANDARD The PTP or Standard protocol has a data link filter offset of 16 bytes from the beginning of the packet The data link filter is the first byte after the LENGTH TYPE field Packet Capture receives the PTP packets without a reliable address field This means that the packets marked Tx for transmit have an accurate address field but the packets marked Rx for receive do not have an accurate addre
80. 0000000 00000000 cor 00000000 00000000 inc 00000000 00000000 Slot 2 is attempting to read the og cfg configuration file specified in the boot command from the memory card in Slot 2 The NVFS Non Volatile File System entity is responsible for reading and writing to the memory card 57 mm dd yy 11 48 34 314 DEBUG 2 GAME 66 BackBone s became re connected starting Loader 58 mm dd yy 11 48 34 318 DEBUG 2 LOADER 2 Loader starting service gate 0x000al 0x300a22ea env 0x00004009 flags 0x1 59 mm dd yy 11 48 34 322 DEBUG 2 GAME 200 Board ID Client slot 2 type 2 60 mm dd yy 11 48 34 439 DEBUG 2 LOADER 2 Loader starting service gate 0x00066 0x30041692 env 0x00004009 flags 0x1 61 mm dd yy 11 48 34 459 DEBUG 2 VFS 60 Memory card inserted FLASH EMBEDDED ALGORITHMS memory type detected Memory card media info Mfg ID 0x1 Device ID 0x29 number of chips 8 62 mm dd yy 11 48 34 459 INFO 2 VFS 42 Service initializing 63 mm dd yy 11 48 34 564 DEBUG 2 LOADER 2 Loader starting service gate 0x00013 0x30095442 env 0x00004009 flags 0x1 64 mm dd yy 11 48 34 564 DEBUG 2 IB 12 Attempting to obtain config file 65 mm dd yy 11 48 34 564 DEBUG 2 GAME 84 FWD 2 0007 a0000013 gt 90000011 down 10000000 no_ACK 00000000 NAK 10000000 Slot 2 received a boot request from Slot 3 66 mm dd yy 11 48 34 65
81. 1 show dslel port DS1E1 Port Status Slot Conn State 1 Loopback 2 Up MTU Loopback State 1600 Net Line 1600 No Loop 2 entries in table Accept Loopback Mode Enabled off SLOT 2 MIB Code SLOT 2 MIB Code SLOT 4 DS1El Code BERT Line Line FDL Type Coding Type ESF B8ZS ANSI ESF B8ZS ANSI Enabled Off 7 5 22 FDL Addr BY BY If you click on Loop Down the MIB entity disables the Line loopback and the log shows the following 3 1 log fftwid 2 mm dd yy 11 06 25 815 wfSnmp 3 0 set to 192 32 18 9 3 mm dd yy 11 06 25 918 wfDslElActionEntry 4 905102 set to 2 4 mm dd yy 11 06 31 675 Connector COMI Connector COMI Logical Logical Lin I I D FO FO EBUG SLOT SLOT SLOT Lin 1 time_slot 1 1 time_slot 2 2 2 4 MIB MIB DS1I Code Code El Code 50 A 33 Troubleshooting Routers Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 3 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 4 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 5 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 6 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 7 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 8 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 9 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 10 5 mm dd yy 11
82. 15 07 774 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 34 Connector COM2 DATA Available The software assigns a valid circuit number to the line 47 mm dd yy 14 15 07 774 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 44 SW Sent you are cc 3 message to line 2 48 mm dd yy 14 15 07 782 INFO SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 7 Dial on demand circuit being established on line 2 The router waits for DSR to come up to indicate the modem established connection to the remote node 49 mm dd yy 14 15 32 552 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM2 FSM State RDTR_WAIT_FOR_DSR 2 Connector COM2 FSM Event RDTR_EVENT_DSR_UP 3 isdn flags 0x2e DSR is up 50 mm dd yy 14 15 32 552 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 54 Connector COM2 DSR has come up 51 mm dd yy 14 15 32 552 INFO SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 31 Connector COM2 Connection established A 19 Troubleshooting Routers The PPP link over the dial on demand circuit establishes an LCP Link Control Protocol connection The messages beginning with Message 57 show that the network protocol IP software starts and that IP establishes a connection over the dial on demand link 52 mm dd yy 14 15 32 552 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 43 Sending LCP Configure Request on circuit 3 53 mm dd yy 14 15 32 681 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 55 Received LCP Configure Ack on circuit 3 54 mm dd yy 14 15 34 867 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Cod
83. 28 0052 Sending and Retrieving Files to and from Bay Networks Sending us your configuration files traces and router logs can help us isolate and solve the problem with your router You can send files to and from Bay Networks by using one of the following methods e Use the Bay Networks anonymous FTP file server If you can access the Internet you can use FTP to forward configuration files traces router logs and so on e Use an asynchronous file transfer program such as Procom e Connect a modem to the problem router and ask us to use XMODEM commands to retrieve configuration files logs and traces 8 2 Getting Help Fax copies to the Bay Networks Technical Response Center at 508 670 8765 Note Although Bay Networks has a bulletin board system available to contracted support customers you cannot transfer files over it Use the Bay Networks anonymous FTP file server as follows 1 Enter the following command ftp 192 32 253 5 Enter the following after the Name prompt anonymous Enter the following after the Password prompt ident To send a file enter cd incoming to retrieve a file enter cd outgoing If your company does not have a dedicated directory enter the following command to create one mkdir lt your_company_directory_name gt Enter the following command to access your company directory cd lt your_company_directory_name gt Enter the following command to specify a binary transmission
84. 3 Service initializing 75 mm dd yy 11 48 35 377 DEBUG 2 MIB 70 Config manager A soloist is a software entity that runs on only one slot in the router at a time The soloists Technician Interface and TI_RUI the remote command line interpreter are starting up and determining what slot they run on the election process The gate ID for the Technician Interface is 0x15 The gate ID for TI_RUI is 0x57 76 mm dd yy 11 48 35 393 DEBUG 2 LOADER 2 Loader starting service gate 0x0000c 0x3003a926 env 0x00000000 flags 0x1 77 mm dd yy 11 48 35 393 DEBUG 2 GAME 23 SOLO 0x00015 election opening 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 78 mm dd yy 11 48 35 424 DEBUG 2 MIB 61 D A Loaded 13 MIB mappings 79 mm dd yy 11 48 35 506 DEBUG 2 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00015 election WON 0x20000000 repl b0000009 30000000 80 mm dd yy 11 48 35 510 DEBUG 2 GAME 23 SOLO 0x00015 election CLOSING 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 81 mm dd yy 11 48 35 533 DEBUG 2 LOADER 2 Loader starting service gate 0x000le 0x300alfa2 env 0x00000000 flags 0x1 82 mm dd yy 11 48 35 541 INFO 2 NOV_SYNC 2 Service initializing 83 mm dd yy 11 48 35 584 DEBUG 2 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00015 election CLOSED 0x20000000 repl b0000009 30000000 A 5 Troubleshooting Routers 84 mm dd yy 11 48 35 662 DEBUG 2 LOADER 2 Loader starting servic
85. 600 Net Line Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 5 2 Up 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 2 entries in table The Loopback LED lights The following command displays the new port status 3 1 show dslel port DS1E1 Port Status Slot Conn State MTU Loopback Accept BERT Line Line FDL FDL State Loopback Mode Type Coding Type Addr 4 1 Up 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 5 2 Up 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY A 32 Reading the Event Log The same unscheduled message shown in Line 8 earlier applies to FDL Line Loop IA and IB If you click on FDL Disable ALL the MIB entity disables all FDL line loops It sends a Universal Loopback Deactivate message 16 mm dd yy 10 58 54 840 wfDs1ElActionEntry 5 905102 set to 7 17 mm dd yy 10 58 54 871 Connector COM1 Unscheduled FDL messag Loopback Deactivate INFO SLOT 2 MIB Code INFO SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code received type Universal 5 32 If you click on Loop Up the line goes into a loopback state The only visible evidence of this state is that the loopback LED lights The log shows the following 2 mm dd yy 11 02 41 489 wfSnmp 3 0 set to 192 32 18 9 3 mm dd yy 11 02 41 552 wfDs1ElActionEntry 4 905102 set to 1 4 mm dd yy 11 02 47 292 Logical Line 1 LLC service withdrawn Connector COM1 INFO INFO INFO The following command displays the new port status 3
86. 70 0057776 gt tftp exe 0x31666030 0020488 gt snmp exe 0x3166b050 0030328 gt tn exe Ox316726e0 0038424 gt arp exe 0x31685720 0009784 gt ip exe 0x31687d70 0182004 If a significant number of lack of resource errors are occurring such as more than 50 min report the problem to the Bay Networks Technical Response Center 3 16 Bad Forward Checksum Errors Troubleshooting an Operational Problem An event message beginning with buf follows the bad forward reception buffer checksum error Look at the text in bold in Figure 3 2 mm dd yy 12 35 56 141 122 57 1 5 GAME W bad fwd receive buffer checksum mm dd yy 12 35 56 141 122 57 1 5 GAME D buf 0x801c1b30 0x00000000 0x801 0x801 0x801 0x801 0x801 0x801 0x801 0x80 Figure 3 2 ce400 da86c da87c da88c da89c da8ac da8bc Oxffc0001 1 0x007c04a4 0x306da810 xsum 0xd7781ec8 0x00050004 0x0022d300 0x76c00000 0x76c00000 0x8b51704d Oxf300001c 0x20009000 0x39303238 0x5645525f 0x30682854 0x8638002b 0xa4850452 0x41343835 0x41353039 Ox0f00bbbb 0x0004000A Oxb9f1 1240 0xc0000000 0x0002030c 0x31303030 0x30313032 0x50534552 0x00000000 0x00000000 Finding the Slot Number When the Message References a Backplane BOFL Look at the number to the left of GAME on the first line This is the number of the slot receiving the packet In Figure 3 2 Slot 5 received th
87. 8 DEBUG 2 BOOT 3 Boot service request received from 0x1000000e Slot 2 is reporting that messages it sent to slot 3 were not acknowledged Slot 3 is unable to respond because it is still booting A 4 Reading the Event Log The software interface to the kernel provides for the transmission of both unreliable and reliable messages The two types of reliable messages are GFWD GAME forward and GRPC GAME remote procedure call Below is an example of a GFWD message failure logged by Slot 2 67 a0000013 gt 90000011 68 a0000013 gt 90000011 69 a0000013 gt 90000011 mm dd yy 11 48 34 701 DEBUG 2 down 10000000 mm dd yy 11 48 34 822 DEBUG 2 down 10000000 mm dd yy 11 48 34 955 DEBUG 2 down 10000000 Slot 2 reads the configuration file log cfg loading a 7 60 type configuration GAME FWD 84 2 0008 no_ACK 00000000 NAK 10000000 GAME 84 FWD 2 0009 no_ACK 00000000 NAK 10000000 GAME 84 FWD 2 000a no_ACK 00000000 NAK 10000000 70 mm dd yy 11 48 35 150 INFO 2 MIB 4 Using configuration file 2 log cfg 71 mm dd yy 11 48 35 221 DEBUG 2 NVFS 63 NVFS manager is opening file log cfg for reading 72 mm dd yy 11 48 35 271 DEBUG 2 NVFS 64 NVFS manager is closing file log cfg 73 mm dd yy 11 48 35 279 DEBUG 2 MIB 66 Initializing IB with configuration file information 74 mm dd yy 11 48 35 354 INFO 2 MIB
88. 916 939 1010 ATM adaptation layer Advanced Communications Engine Access Feeder Node adaption layer control Access Link Node alternate mark inversion Access Node Address Resolution Protocol American Standard Code for Information Interchange Access Stack Node AppleTalk Asynchronous Transfer Mode binary eight zeros substitution Backbone Concentrator Node Backward Explicit Congestion Notification bit error rate test Backbone Link Node Backbone Node breath of life basic rate interface Carrier Detect Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol xix Troubleshooting Routers CID CN CRC CRN CSMA CD CSU CTS DCE DLCI DLSw DOS DP DPRAM DS DS1E1 DSAP DSL DSR DSU DTE DTR EIA ESF FDDI FDL FECN FN FRE FRE 2 FSI FSM FTP GAME channel identifier Concentrator Node cyclic redundancy check call request number Carrier Sense Multiple Access Carrier Detect Ethernet channel service unit clear to send data communication equipment data link control identifier Data Link Switch Disk Operating System Data Path Dual Port RAM directory service multichannel T1 E1 driver service destination service access point digital subscriber loop data set ready digital service unit data terminal equipment data terminal ready Electronic Industry Association extended super frame Fiber Distributed Data Interface Facility Data Link Forward Explicit Congestion Notification FECN Feeder Node Fas
89. B 37 Base a EUS ES a sacreses Fade eta Misc eacaieaun tala a B 37 Waga Palhoat tet ais aca Crcaadve EAA B 42 Fiter e082 110 oa 02 ae te nee Oe eee ee sn eer anne Ostend Se svcnre eer erent mre errs eee ree B 44 Media Speciic Instructions and Examples sicsccciicssccssseccessactianverascenesiiteoniceresanions B 48 OD n EN EAR B 48 Protocols Supported By Synchronous T1 E1 and MGT 0 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeeees B 49 TOKEM FRING Merete erect mere erates rrr ert ree reer str er errr meter B 53 ig 8 8 Deer A N tea creer E E O eer rm rer corm re rery A rr errr ner ere E te B 54 PISS snara s gacaauy dcideare cane duvuleadiante hedeaaneeateede anes B 54 SEN acces cea ten tesamnantcaauapeaitysieendiee Seca seus ES B 54 Interpreting a Packet Capture Instance Number ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeees B 55 Index Figure 1 1 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 6 1 Figure 7 1 Figures Filtering Parameters Window csciesscchalccteediantatew denied 1 6 Verifying the Slot ID on an ASN ienna 3 5 Finding the Slot Number When the Message References Sepia BOGE suria aia Ra este 3 17 Finding the Slot Number When the Message Does Not Reference a Backplane BORL csc ctccavicswiaiteenn seated ee 3 19 Comparing the Endstation and Router Configurations cccce 6 13 Cannot Find File Emor MESAJE siccsssctersyaatinccerdunscnarceminecstiaianioeneastiuastie 7 2 xi Tables Table 1 1 Technician Interface Event Messa
90. B 44 Instructions Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Set to 1 capture if you want Packet Capture to copy only the packets containing the data that matches the string Set to 2 trigger if you want Packet Capture to terminate when it matches data in a packet to the string Packet Capture does not copy the packet containing the match Set to 3 if you want Packet Capture to copy every packet on a circuit regardless of its contents Note You can configure a filter as a capture type or a trigger type but not both If you configure two receive filters one a capture filter and the other a trigger filter configure the trigger filter afterwards Parameters Offset Packet Capture supports four Offset parameters The MIB information is as follows tonne Filter Attribute Name Attribute MIB Object ID irection No No Incoming 1 wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Offset 15 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 15 Incoming 2 wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Offset 25 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 25 Outgoing 1 wfPktCaptureTxFltr1 Offset 20 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 20 Outgoing 2 wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Offset 31 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 31 Default Range Function Instructions None Limited to size of buffer Sets the offset in bytes from the reference point into the packet The byte pointed to by the offset is the first byte in the packet that will be checked for a match Refer to the media you are filtering in the section Media Specific
91. BDR on the segment how many hello packets the interface received and transmitted and how many link state updates it received and received and transmitted Troubleshooting IPX This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to IPX If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem This section assumes that you have loaded the scripts Refer to Using Technician Interface Scripts for instructions Troubleshoot IPX as follows 1 Use the Events Manager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for IPX running on the slots in question The Technician Interface command is log fftwid elPX s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid elPX s3 s4 6 16 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Make sure that the IPX routing software is up To do this use the Statistics Manager Quick Get Facility to display the value of wfApplication gt wfIpxGroup gt wflIpxBaseState or use the Technician Interface to load the scripts and enter the following Technician Interface script command show ipx base Example Sshow ipx base IPX Base Record Configuration Information Protocol State Router Name IPX Up 1 Primary NN Router Name None one Route Method Mult Host Mode Maximum Path Tick Based Enabled 1 Log Filter Setting PreConfigured Net Table Size
92. Config gt wfHwTable gt wfHwConfigFile values Example Name of Slot Source configuration location of volume of file on the processor configuration source in router file in use volume get wfHwEntry 26 wfHwEntry wfHwConfigFile nil wfHwEntry wfHwConfigFileJj2 2flconfig wfHwEntry wfHwConfigFile j3 2flconfig wfHwEntry wfHwConfigFilej4 2flconfig wfHwEntry wfHwConfigFileJ5 2flconfig All settings for all processors must be the same In this example the processors in Slots 2 through 5 are operating with the configuration file named config which came from the file system in Volume 2 Note t is OK to use a router software image from one volume and a configuration from another If the slots are operating with configuration files from different volumes do the following 1 Display the directory for each slot and compare the file sizes of the configuration files If they are the same size the configuration files are consistent If they are not continue with the remaining steps 2 Compare the file sizes with the backup configuration file stored on the Site Manager 3 9 Troubleshooting Routers Determine which configuration file is the one you want to use Back up the unwanted configuration file Remove the unwanted configuration file A Ge Determine which slots are running with the incorrect configuration file and reset them Lost Password A Danger Follow these ins
93. DState 1 1 1 wfCSMACDEntry wfCSMACDState 1 2 2 wf CSMACDEntry wfCSMACDState 10 1 wfCSMACDEntry wfCSMACDState 10 2 1 1 Note You can use an asterisk in place of the attribute or instance in a get command but you cannot use one in place of both You can use the complete MIB number in place of the lt object gt lt attribute gt specification The parameter descriptions in the configuration manuals list the MIB number for this reason SNMP commands also use this syntax If you enter a get command and the message object does not exist appears do the following 1 Check the spelling and case of the object name 2 Configure and enable the object Refer to Using Technician Interface Software for more detailed instructions on how to use the Technician Interface to display and change the values in the MIB The advantage of using the Technician Interface scripts the Statistics Manager or the Configuration Manager instead of the Technician Interface commands is that you don t have to know an object attribute and instance in order to display or change a setting The next two sections introduce you to the Technician Interface scripts and the Statistics Manager This manual assumes that you already know how to use the Configuration Manager Introduction Using the Technician Interface Scripts to Access the MIB The script files are simple programs consisting of one or more SNMP get commands that allow you to displa
94. EBUG 3 LOADER 2 Loader starting service gate 0x000le 0x300alfa2 env 0x00000000 flags 0x1 248 mm dd yy 11 48 50 115 INFO 3 NOV_SYNC 2 Service initializing 249 mm dd yy 11 48 50 123 DEBUG 3 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00057 election LOST 0xb0000000 repl b0000009 30000000 SOLO 0x00057 election CLOSING 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 250 mm dd yy 11 48 50 131 DEBUG 3 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00057 election CLOSED 0x10000000 repl b0000009 30000000 The configuration file has a different link module than the one actually in the slot 273 mm dd yy 11 48 51 240 WARN 3 on slot 3 misconfigured ignoring LOAD ER 6 Link Module Slot 3 uses the dynamic loader to load the necessary executable modules from Slot 2 s memory not the memory card in Slot 2 But if a module is not in Slot 2 s memory the dynamic loader gets it from the router software image on the memory card 275 mm dd yy 11 48 51 275 DEBUG 2 serving request for ip exe from 0x1000602a 276 mm dd yy start address Loader serving request for snmp 11 48 51 279 DEBUG 3 loader transaction with slot 2 server for ip exe size 0x00020984 c 0x304E9770 OAD exe from 0x10006 OAD ER 32 Loader 02b ER 27 Dynamic hecksum 0x00976221 A 12 starting application ip exe Reading the Event Log
95. Files Store backup copies of the configuration files on the Site Manager workstation To prevent confusion use a log to record the location name and purpose of each configuration file you back up Organizing and naming the backup files on the Site Manager workstation will also help you prevent mix ups Caution Always back up a file before deleting it This includes configuration and log files And always back up the current log file on the Site Manager workstation before clearing it you may want to refer to it later to troubleshoot a problem Maintaining Consistent Files in Multiple Memory Cards If the router uses multiple memory cards make sure that each file is consistent in each memory card designated for storing files of that type For example if you make a change to a router software image or configuration file save the file to each memory card that contains the same files To make sure that the files of the same name are consistent on multiple memory cards display the directory of each card and compare the sizes of each file Handling Memory Cards to Prevent Static Damage Always use an antistatic wrist strap when handling memory cards static electricity can damage them Troubleshooting Routers Responding to a Failed prom Command Caution If the Technician Interface prom command fails do not reboot Instead call the Bay Networks Technical Response Center If you reboot after the prom command fails a Bay Netw
96. Frames This shows the number of frames clipped in the driver s transmission routine due to transmission congestion Check for the type of data that is transmitting Determine whether a broadcast storm is disrupting the network or whether the traffic is too heavy for the segment wfCSMACDRxReplenMisses This shows the number of packet buffer misses while attempting to replenish driver reception ring Another entity is using all of the available buffers Go to Memory or Buffer Problem in Chapter 3 wfCSMACDUnAlignedFrames This shows the number of non word aligned frames received for transmission A non word aligned frame means that the starting address of the data in memory is not an even number Some protocol implementations in the router create non word aligned frames 5 10 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem If the Ethernet controller is not a QENET you can ignore this attribute If the Ethernet controller is a QENET check for underruns or corrupted frames This usually occurs only when you configure three or more ports on the QENET If underflow errors or corrupted frames occur enable the attribute wfCSMACDAlignmentMode This attribute determines whether the software aligns the frame on a word boundary before giving it to the QENET wfCSMACDLateCollnRx This shows the number of late collisions received A late collision reception is a collision that takes place after the router receives the first 64 byt
97. G 2 GAME 23 SOLO 0x00401 election CLOSING 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 ARP successfully initializes on Circuit 1 199 mm dd yy 11 48 45 057 INFO 2 ARP 1 Service is up on Circuit L Data Path registers the ISAP internal services access point for ARP The protocol type for ARP is 0806 this type determines that the ARP traffic will go to the correct gate and code by the DP Data Path The number preceding the protocol type indicates the packet format 1 Ethernet type 2 2 802 2 3 SNAP Subnetwork Access Protocol 4 Novell and so on Data Path registers Ethernet Type II or SNAP ARP frames on Circuit 1 In this example Data Path does not register the 802 2 ARP frame type If Circuit 1 received an 802 2 ARP frame ARP would not receive it instead it would go to the learning bridge 201 mm dd yy 11 48 45 135 DEBUG 2 DP registered on cct 1 202 mm dd yy 11 48 45 140 DEBUG 2 DP registered on cct 1 205 mm dd yy 11 48 45 213 DEBUG 2 ARP 128 128 2 2 registered 34 ISAP 0x30806 34 ISAP 0x10806 3 Arp Client A 10 Reading the Event Log Data Path always registers Ethernet and SNAP frames for IP In this example Data Path registers ISAPs on Circuit 1 for the following protocols IP Ethernet type 0800 IPX Ethernet type 8137 and DECnet Ethernet type 6003 The number preceding the protocol indicates the packet Notice how DECnet only registers one packet
98. House and 221 Main Middleton is an instance of that object Table 1 2 shows the object House its attributes its instances and its values The attributes and instances are in bold and the values are in regular print Troubleshooting Routers Table 1 2 Example of an Imaginary Object Named House Attributes Instances 221 Main Middle ton 10 Pleasant Eas ton 42 Elm Weston HowMuchlLikelt 12 1 10 10 is the highest rating ListPrice 1 in thousands of 150 160 170 dollars SizeOfLot 2 in thousands of 10 20 10 square feet TypeOfHouse 3 1 colonial 1 2 1 2 ranch 3 cape Color 4 1 white 2 1 1 2 green 3 brown Town 5 Middleton Easton Weston Street 6 Main Pleasant Elm HouseNo 7 221 10 42 Garage 8 0 none 0 1 1 1 one car 2 two car Bedrooms 9 3 3 2 Bathrooms 10 1 2 1 TotalSquareFeet 11 in 15 18 12 thousands 7 6 3 Suppose you create a lot of diverse objects and you want to organize them You can create an object to organize and provide access to objects that fit into the same category For example you could create an object named ItemsToPurchase and the object identifier 1 to store the objects House and Car You could group the ItemsToPurchase with an object named Inventory by putting them both in an Introduction object named Things and assign the object identifier 1 to Things If you created this hie
99. IA or IB types the following messages appear 3 mm dd yy 10 43 14 207 INFO SLOT 2 MIB Code 5 wfDslElActionEntry 5 905102 set to 1 4 mm dd yy 10 43 14 207 INFO SLOT 5 DS1E1 Code 22 A 31 Troubleshooting Routers Connector COM2 Logical Line 1 LLC service withdrawn 5 mm dd yy 10 43 14 238 INFO SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 27 Connector COM1 Unscheduled FDL message received type Line Loopback Activate If you click on the FDL Disable Line Loop option the LED turns off and the following log messages appear 3 mm dd yy 10 46 19 624 INFO SLOT 2 MIB Code 5 wfDslElActionEntry 5 905102 set to 6 4 mm dd yy 10 48 24 391 INFO SLOT 2 MIB Code 7 wfSnmp 3 0 set to 0 0 0 0 5 mm dd yy 10 48 24 454 DEBUG SLOT 2 SNMP Code 35 Agent cleared lock 6 mm dd yy 10 49 10 786 INFO SLOT 2 IB Code 7 wfSnmp 3 0 set to 192 32 18 9 7 mm dd yy 10 49 10 849 INFO SLOT 2 IB Code 5 wfDslElActionEntry 5 905102 set to 4 8 mm dd yy 10 49 10 867 INFO SLOT 4 DSI1E1 Code 28 Connector COM1 Unscheduled FDL message received type Line Loopback Deactivate 9 mm dd yy 10 49 10 910 DEBUG SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 50 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 1 The following command displays the new port status 3 1 show dslel port DS1E1 Port Status Slot Conn State MTU Loopback Accept BERT Line Line FDL FDL State Loopback Mode Type Coding Type Addr 4 1 Loopback 1
100. IPCP Configure Nak on circuit 2 84 mm dd yy 13 13 26 094 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 55 Received IPCP Configure Ack on circuit 2 85 mm dd yy 13 13 26 220 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 54 Received IPCP Configure Request on circuit 2 86 mm dd yy 13 13 26 224 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 44 Sending IPCP Configure Ack on circuit 2 87 mm dd yy 13 13 26 224 INFO SLOT 2 PPP Code 28 IPCP up on circuit 2 The protocol on top of the dial on demand link is active The V 25bis communication ends The modem dropped the DSR signal to the router and the router in turn dropped DTR to terminate the connection to the modem ULI stands for upper layer indication 88 mm dd yy 13 13 26 224 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_WAIT_FOR_ULI 6 A 26 Connector COM1 LLC1 service withdrawn Reading the Event Log 89 mm dd yy 13 13 26 228 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_ULI_IND 15 isdn flags 0x420b 90 mm dd yy 13 13 51 529 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS CONNECTED 7 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_DSR_DN 4 isdn flags 0x4201 91 mm dd yy 13 13 51 529 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 32 Connector COM1 DSR lost connection closed 92 mm dd yy 13 13 51 529 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 isdn_down_cct calling drop_dtr 93 mm dd yy 13 13 51 529 INFO SLOT 2 PPP Code 31 Stoppin
101. J RI signal If the modem or CSU does not support this control signal use the Configuration Manager to edit the connector of the backup line click on Modem and disable ring indicator If the CSU does not supply RI Pin J you can create a custom cable to use another signal such as RLSD received line signal detection pin F as RI Pin J RLSD is typically low until the modem establishes a connection and goes low again after DTR toggles Note Disabling ring indicator on the router has no effect in this case The absence of the RI control signal at the master end causes DTR to go high 2 Disconnect the local and remote CSUs from the DCE and use a breakout box to verify whether the DCE modem or CSU is sending a DSR data set ready signal to the router interface in the on state positive voltage 6 26 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem If it is configure the DCE for DSR to follow CD or configure DSR to be in the off state until the DCE receives a DTR signal and reconnect the CSUs Unfortunately DCE manufacturers use inconsistent terminology for these settings Note This is the preferred way to resolve this problem However if the CSUs do not support this solution use the Configuration Manager to edit the connector of the backup line click on modem and disable the ring indicator DTR then goes high only if the primary line becomes unavailable The V 35 pin assignments are RLSD received line signal de
102. SERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_WAIT_FOR_CTS 1 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_CTS_UP 5 isdn flags 0x1 103 mm dd yy 13 13 53 406 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 53 Connector COM1 CTS has come up A 27 Troubleshooting Routers MCT1 Log 104 mm dd yy 13 13 53 406 DEBUG SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 9 Connector COM1 modem present V 25bis mode 105 mm dd yy 13 13 53 406 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Line Mgr received line ready for line 1 106 mm dd yy 13 13 53 406 INFO SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 10 Sync Line 1 available for dial on demand pool 1 107 mm dd yy 13 13 53 406 INFO SLOT 2 SYNC Code 11 Connector COM1 providing LLCl service Information in a Lab Testing Environment The following log messages show what happens when you access the Line Tests option and use Port 2 of an MCT1 2 in Slot 5 to send a payload loopback to Port 1 of an MCT 1 2 Slot 4 During this test the yellow loopback LED lights on Port 1 in Slot 4 When you enter the Technician Interface script command show ds1e1 port the Technician Interface accesses the MCT bat file and the MIB and displays the MCT1 2 port setup 3 1 show dslel port DS1E1 Port Status Slot Conn State MTU Loopback Accept BERT Line Line FDL FDL State Loopback Mode Type Coding Type Addr T Loopback 1600 Net Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY Payload 2 Up 1600 No Loop Enabled Off ESF B8ZS ANSI BY 2 entries in tab
103. Troubleshooting Routers Router Software Version 10 0 Site Manager Software Version 4 0 Part No 112937 Rev A January 1996 a Bay Networks Bay Networks 4401 Great America Parkway 8 Federal Street Santa Clara CA 95054 Billerica MA 01821 Copyright 1988 1996 Bay Networks Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA January 1996 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Bay Networks Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that license A summary of the Software License is included in this document Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 Gi of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notice for All Other Executive Agencies Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and
104. ach and think of solutions during this reflective period e They provide you with a record of the tasks you performed This record is essential because You can refer to it during the procedure in order to recall whether you already performed a certain task A diagnostic procedure can include many tasks It is easy to forget for example which statistics you checked and what they revealed at a given time 1 23 Troubleshooting Routers You can refer to it in order to tell whether after implementing a test solution you repeated important diagnostic steps You can refer to notes concerning previous occurrences of the same problem to find hints on how to recover quickly You can provide the information needed by another interested colleague manager or Bay Networks Technical Response Center representative if you cannot resolve the problem yourself Performing One Corrective Task at a Time Always perform one corrective task at a time Then repeat the test that you performed to identify the problem in order to validate the correction Verify whether the task solved the problem before performing the next corrective task This way you know which task solved the problem If you perform multiple corrective tasks without verifying the success of each sequentially you may unknowingly make one of the following mistakes e Complicate the original problem e Solve the problem but cause another e Solve the problem
105. ackplane 7 6 clearlog 1 5 commit 1 3 1 16 diags 3 20 get 1 16 8 3 get command wildcard character 1 17 ifconfig a 7 8 list 1 14 to 1 18 loadmap 3 13 to 3 16 log 1 7 monitor 1 19 netstat r 6 8 osidata 6 21 ping 1 20 pktconv B 34 pktdump B 13 B 33 prom command failed 1 4 put 8 3 run setpath 1 19 save config 1 3 save log 1 5 set 1 2 1 3 1 16 show 1 19 wichkeny 7 3 wfchkinst 7 3 commit command 1 2 1 3 1 16 communities SNMP 7 5 CompuServe Bay Networks forum on xvi configuration files consistency among slots 3 9 Configuration Manager modes 1 2 configuration saving 1 17 contiguous free space 3 11 converting Packet Capture files B 33 create attribute 6 30 creation of a gate 1 9 crossover cables 5 23 CSMACD See Ethernet Current Screens List window 1 20 customer support See getting help D date and time filtering events 1 7 debug event messages 1 7 A 1 to A 35 default zone seed conflict event message 6 3 Index 2 delete attribute 6 30 diags command 3 20 dial on demand raise DTR event messages A 18 to A 22 dial on demand V 25bis event messages A 22 to A 28 digital subscriber loops DSLs 6 28 direct mode 5 2 direction Packet Capture B 17 disable attribute 6 30 displaying log 1 5 Distinct TCP IP 7 2 DLCI VC 5 16 DLSw Data Link Switch 6 4 to 6 5 downstream neighbor 5 13 DSOs Directory Service 0 channels
106. ad only memory chip point to point Standard Protocol permanent virtual circuit Quad Ethernet Link Module random access memory ring indicator routing information field Routing Information Protocol registered jack received line signal detection read only memory rate queue routing table manager remote procedure call super frame Service Advertising Protocol segmentation and reassembly sustainable cell rate Subnetwork Access Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol Service Profile Identifier Stack Packet Exchange Stack Packet Exchange signal quality error System Resource Module server table manager switched access service Transmission Control Protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol terminal endpoint identifier command line interpreter xxii TTL ULI VC VCI VCL VME VPI WCLCK WINSOCK DLL ZIP About This Guide time to live upper layer indication virtual circuit virtual channel identifier virtual channel link Versa Module Eurocard virtual path identifier system clock Windows Socket Dynamic Link Library file Zone Information Protocol xxiii Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter includes the following sections e Preventing Problems e Preparing to Troubleshoot 73 Documenting Each Step 73 Performing One Corrective Task at a Time Preventing Problems The following sections offer tips on how to prevent the most common errors that
107. akom pernan EDE casa Sects dae a ence alveccue tea aiug ood eed Satine gam aca A 22 MCT1 Log Information in a Lab Testing Environment reremen A 28 Appendix B Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture OVON sanceaseionareesiienanseatditantaadad snoeaass a B 1 NETS SUMS TIC MOIES sists asso uhiies cad dasscesc ad aaa a dedana B 4 Geroa Sie aaa aaa rr Mamiaeiass B 4 Prepatinig Packet Garters To AON airiiiarna nondi ai EA AANA B 4 Assigning the Processors to Run Packet Capture cccccssseeeesesteeeeeseneaes B 5 Creating an Instance of Packet CARDING gccccicciscccsicecsicctiuesinsacsonerisanoniecensaanienses B 6 Allocating Memory for the Packet Capture File 0 c ccceecceseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees B 10 Specifying the Number of Bytes in Each Packet to Copy cecccceesseeesseseeeees B 11 Enabling Packet CADUTE tzcncingsincerniie eee aliaaalaiaena aaeaniite B 11 Staring Packet CADUTE sappii T serr mnt en re nT recep B 12 Terminating Packet Capture A EET T popsii G enan B 12 Using the Technician Interface to Display a Packet Capture File ceeeee B 13 Deleting a Packet Capture INSTANCE iis ctudnsers einen indice asana B 16 Using Optional PRU ES raniad aa E B 16 Configuring the Direction of the Packets to be Copied c cccsceeeeseeeeteeeeees B 16 Configuring a Termination Trigger ere ere RE P TT TE B 17 ASS FIETS oeiee ia AEA EAS B 19 Setting the Filte
108. al 23 remote 0 is up The following log messages show what happens when you remove the link module in Slot 3 Data Path kills the gate assigned to the circuit that becomes unavailable 383 mm dd yy 11 51 10 612 WARN 2 MODULE been removed 386 mm dd yy 11 51 10 632 DEBUG 2 DP Line GH 0xa0004082 died cct 1 387 mm dd yy 11 51 10 640 DEBUG 2 DP DP killing CC gate for cct 1 rcvd for line gate 0x20004082 on cct 1 Found dead line 0x20004082 at offset 0 Last line 0x20004082 in cct 1 died killing circuit gate 3 23 41 I O module has dp_line_map LINE_DOWN msg In this example the user issued a command to save a log file to the memory card A 16 403 mm dd yy is opening file 11 52 07 684 DEBUG 2 log sav for writing NVFS Reading the Event Log 63 NVFS manager A 17 Troubleshooting Routers Dial on Demand Raise DTR Log The following log shows a successful dial on demand connection between the COM2 port in Slot 2 and a modem configured for Raise DTR These messages appear only when you click on the port configured for dial on demand and set the Debug option under the Modem definition to Enabled If you are using the Technician Interface set attribute 29 the debug attribute of the object wfModemlfEntry to 1 1 enabled 2 disabled The Debug option is available with Software Version 8 01 and later The following message indicat
109. ames and generating errors e The reception and transmission statistics If the reception or transmission statistics do not change do the following Check the reception and transmission statistics of the other ports in the same slot Try disabling and enabling the port and watch the log messages to determine why the connection will not come up e The error statistics Look at the forwarding tables of each router in the path to determine e Whether entries exist e Whether the next hop addresses are in the right direction 5 26 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem 5 Verify the configuration parameters 6 Use Packet Capture and a network analyzer to check the segments involved in the problem 5 27 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem This chapter describes how to solve network layer problems It assumes you have already determined the scope of your problem as described in Chapter 2 This chapter includes the following sections Troubleshooting AppleTalk Troubleshooting DLSw ce Troubleshooting IP Troubleshooting IPX Troubleshooting OSI 6 Troubleshooting Switched Services Troubleshooting Other Networking Protocols 6 1 Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting AppleTalk This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to AppleTalk If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instruct
110. anager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for OSI running on the slots in question The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eOSI s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eOSI s3 s4 Enter the following command and parameters to request data from the OSI interface osidata s lt siot no gt t lt type gt i lt D gt lt slot no gt is the number of a slot on which the OSI service is running on the router Valid values are 1 to 13 inclusive lt type gt is the database information you want displayed Valid values are e Isp_L1 link state packet for Level 1 e Isp_L2 link state packet for Level 2 e path_L1 internal path control block for Level 1 path e path_L2 internal path control block for Level 2 path e adj_L1 adjacency control block for Level 1 e adj_L2 adjacency control block for Level 2 e adj_ES adjacency control block for end system lt ID gt is the identifier for the database information The ID varies in length depending on the type For example the LSP ID is 8 bytes the adj ID is 6 bytes and the path ID also referred to as the router ID is 6 bytes All identifiers are in hexadecimal notation 6 21 Troubleshooting Routers This command allows you to display OSI database information about an individual slot in the router The display includes information abo
111. and show ipx rip The RIP Interface Table shows whether you configured the RIP interfaces with RIP Supply RIP Listen or Standard both RIP Supply and RIP Listen 6 18 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Example IPX RIP Interface Record Configuration Information A11 RIP Interface State ode 0x2E000011 Up Standard 0x2E008000 Up Standard 0x2E009000 Up Standard 0x2E010000 Up Standard 0x2E036000 Up Standard 0x2E060010 Up Standard 0x2E060100 Up Standard Make sure the networks you are trying to reach are in the IPX routing table To do this use the Statistics Manager to view the IPX Base Route Table screen or enter the following Technician Interface script command show ipx routes Example Sshow ipx routes IPX Routing Table Information Destination NextHop Net NextHop Host Method Age Ticks Hops 0x0000454B2F59 RIP 20 21 12 0x0000454B2F59 RIP 20 23 1 0x000045B0F556 RIP 10 15 0x000045B0F556 RIP 10 16 0x0000454B2F59 RIP 20 15 0x0000454B2F59 RIP 20 15 0x0000454B2F59 RIP 30 18 0x00000002 0x2E06010 0x00000003 0x2E06010 0x00000022 0x2E06001 0x00000023 0x2E06001 0x00000024 0x2E06010 0x00000025 0x2E06010 0x00000042 0x2E06010 DO OGO OO Or anna uo w Alternatively you can display a route to a specific destination by entering the following Technician Interface script command show ipx route find lt destination_address gt 6 19 Troubleshooting Rout
112. and look up other related problems for the site having the problem It also allows us to do a case history of the router s in question What is the Service Contract Type What is the router s serial number Enter the Technician Interface get wfHwBase 3 0 command to display it Or use the Quick Get tool to display wfHardwareConfig gt wfHwBase gt wfHwBpSerialNumber What are the symptoms of the problem What workaround are you using When did the problem start occurring Under what conditions does the problem occur 8 1 Troubleshooting Routers 8 What if anything has changed in the router and or network 9 Can you reproduce the problem and if so how 10 How is the problem affecting your network 11 What revision of software is currently installed 12 Does the log show you any additional information 13 Do you have a trace of the problem 14 Can you send the Bay Networks Technical Response Center a copy of the configuration file and a binary version of the log file Go to the next section for instructions 15 Can we dial into the router and use Telnet to access it in order to troubleshoot the problem 16 If we do not have an up to date diagram of your network can you fax it to us For additional information or advice contact the Bay Networks Technical Response Center in your area United States 1 800 2LAN WAN Valbonne France 33 92 966 968 Sydney Australia 61 2 903 5800 Tokyo Japan 81 3 3
113. are filtering events from the XNS entity running in Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eXNS s3 s4 Check the base records For example if the networking software with which you are having a problem is XNS enter get wfXnsBase 0 to check the status of the XNS software The most important attributes are e The State attribute shows whether the protocol is up 1 down 2 initializing 3 or not present 4 You cannot change this setting e The Create or Delete attribute reveals whether the network software is created 1 or deleted 2 e The Enable or Disable attribute reveals whether the protocol is enabled 1 or disabled 2 6 30 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Check the values of the following statistics twice and compare them to determine whether the protocol is currently receiving and transmitting packets and generating errors e The reception and transmission statistics If the reception or transmission statistics do not change do the following Check the reception and transmission statistics of the other protocols associated with the same connector and the same slot Try disabling and enabling the protocol and watch the log messages to determine why the connection will not come up e The error statistics Make sure that the next hop and network you are trying to reach are in the routing table entries Verify the configuration parameters Use Packet Capture and a network a
114. ate attribute reveals whether OSPF is created 1 or deleted not 1 e The Enable attribute reveals whether OSPF is enabled 1 or disabled 2 Check the OSPF neighbor states to determine the exchange state with other OSPF routers on the network Neighbor states should be either two way or full the other states init exchange start or loading are interim or transition states Investigate any routers or links that do not recover from these states Look at the link state data base LSDB of the router This is the information from which the router builds its routing table 6 15 Troubleshooting Routers Enter the following command to display the IP forwarding table get wflpBaseRtEntry 7 The Technician Interface displays the table in the following format wfIpBaseRtEntry wfIpBaseRouteNextHop lt network gt lt next_hop gt Identify the incorrect routes If you take a snapshot of your network periodically as described in Chapter 1 comparing the data can help you to identify the incorrect routes Use the Packet Capture utility or a network analyzer to trace routes through the network to see what if any nodes are forwarding incorrect routing information in the form of RIP or Link State packets Determine whether the link is operational and the communication is bi directional You can do this by getting the MIB object wfOspfIfEntry The display shows the state of OSPF on the interface the identity of the DR and
115. ble check the configuration of the line and the line utilization Increase the wf CSMACDCfgRxQueueLength to 64 and see if that helps alleviate the problem wfCSMACDMerr This shows the number of Ethernet controller chip memory errors The controller chip declares an error when it fails to access memory within 1512 clock ticks of asserting its data strobe signal After declaring a memory error the controller chip reinitializes Go to Memory or Buffer Problem in Chapter 3 5 9 Troubleshooting Routers wfCSMACDCerr This shows the number of Ethernet controller chip collision detections This is meaningful only if the attached transceiver or hub device implements an SQE Signal Quality Error also referred to as Ethernet Heartbeat Test as defined in ANSI IEEE 802 3 SQE specifies the periodic assertion of the transceiver s collision detection circuitry during down periods and tests the integrity of the controller chip transceiver connection If the transceiver or hub device does not implement SQE the value 0 or 1 is irrelevant If the transceiver or hub device implements a SQE 0 indicates successful completion of the test 1 indicates that the SQE test failed In this case CSMACD logs an event noting SQE loss and verifies the integrity of the fuse If the fuse is the problem CSMACD logs another event and disables service to the line If the fuse is OK CSMACD retains service to the line wfCSMACDTxClip
116. cal Response Center we may need the binary version of the log file to troubleshoot the problem Do not delete the log file from the router until you are sure you solved the problem After viewing all event messages that pertain to a specific problem and before running tests to isolate the problem you may want to issue the Technician Interface clearlog command or select the Events Manager Administration Clear log option to remove all events from the event log and start with a clean slate We recommend that you save the log before you clear it If you want to save a log in ASCII format select the File gt Save Output to Disk option from the Events Manager window A processor board keeps its log file even if you reset the slot in which the board is present The processor will lose the event messages generated in the slot in which the board is present only if one of the following incidents occur e You clear the log e The router software diagnostic tests run Troubleshooting Routers e The processor board loses power because you removed it a fuse blew or the router lost power Filtering Event Messages You can use the Technician Interface or Events Manager to filter the display of event messages Select ViewFilters to display the Events Manager Configuration Filters window The Filtering Parameters window appears Figure 1 1 Filtering Parameters Legend Include in display Lowlight Exclude from display Severity E
117. ccccecssseeeeeessteeeeeeeeees 1 4 Displaying and Changing Configuration Settings and Statistics 0 00 1 9 MS iG PIN cnisrunsesa E E E T ATA 1 20 Weing Facket Capite risoria nan EN NRE 1 21 Using Inbound Telnet to Access the Technician Interface 0 ccccceeeeeeeeees 1 21 Taking a Snapshot of Your NeIWOIK acco ciate enecenerg ini eiis 1 22 Locumneninog Earh 3 arina reer t PrCPer eT Tneee ARA 1 23 Performing One Corrective Task at a Time eee EATE ET syndat 1 24 Chapter 2 Determining the Scope of a Problem Chapter 3 Troubleshooting an Operational Problem elgg cis clehlgts in aa peer reer ce peerree AEA 3 2 Power PODION sninn a a a rt rts 3 2 Pioni PUSO ainiai 3 2 LERS NOLI sarnsnsrasnisnan aA NANAS 3 3 Four Wont BOOT asirni aa ES 3 3 Gheckmo ihe Boot PROME asrasa a lade eileen 3 6 Making Sure the Router Software Image Is Correct for the Router cseeeeeee 3 6 Making Sure All Slots Use the Same Router Software Image and Configuration File 3 6 Verifying That the Router Software Images in Each Processor Match 00 3 7 Verifying That the Configuration Files in Each Processor Match n se 39 Bre sig 21s Cots 1 9 ae eee a emt rome ee Pe meee f geri ree emer Ere Tomer rere rier enter ree er ere etree 3 10 Ne Space Leton Memory Gaid suensoni AS 3 11 Memory or Buffer Problem aa aana aonan E PARP PT E 3 12 Bad Forvard Checksum EOIS scrissi eea A Aaa R 3 17 Finding
118. cdeicorsectesieeredadbasetnatelenGaaaeealiaaans xvi COOMPUSBING sinnsacsarcsateramienass APEE EE E E E T EEE xvi MRS PANS T asna a Ei xvii MART RED AE AE P adinan aae aaa AA A anani xvii Fow GODRO aranana soivintidaacabeatehunldie ea odontal xvii GOWON ONE aaan a R xviii Ordering Bay Networks PUDICALIONS siiurrcsioineninnieido ren aiaa aia Xix PEIS seacais tadueataen tase aanadader dasbsageet meioesereaanalent pecasgederadnciuaasees xix Chapter 1 Introduction PPE aN PP US TNS 5 vaca tad cic sancti ad adele addin ea enc di ea see 1 1 Reading the Release Notes and Relevant Documentation 0 cccsescceeeesteeeeeees 1 2 Minimizing Disruption When Installing New Software ccccccsceeseeseeeeeeeteeeeees 1 2 Selecting the Proper Tool for Configuring a ROuter cceccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Saving Your GONTQURATION CHANDOS aiccs ssccccsssarcctaeiasscereceasadscisineandaaniaineduriacceas 1 2 rE WS UIT INCE oa ts ccctas Sa ssee 1 isegeaesavenead eE NS 1 3 Maintaining Consistent Files in Multiple Memory Cards 0 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 1 3 Handling Memory Cards to Prevent Static Damage c ce eccsceccsseeeeseeeeeneeeesseeeeees 1 3 Responding to a Failed prom Command onsas E E EE tocar 1 4 Preparing to Pou l SHOGE nurori i annan N NREN 1 4 Getting Acquainted with the Troubleshooting Tools ccccccscccsseeceeseeeesteeeecseeeeees 1 4 Using the System Log to Display Event Messages
119. command to create an instance for Logical Line 10902101 set wfPktCaptureEntry 1 10902101 1 commit Creating an Instance for Other Media Create an instance as follows 1 Find the media in the following list and enter the associated Technician Interface command to get the number of the logical line from which you want to copy packets Note Enter the upper case and lower case characters exactly as they appear in these instructions e Bisynchronous get wfBisyncEntry 13 lt s ot gt lt connector gt 13 represents the wfBisyncLineNumber attribute e Ethernet CSMA CD get wfCSMACDEntry 38 lt slot gt lt connector gt 38 represents the wfCSMACDLineNumber attribute e Sync T1 El or ISDN B Channel get wfSyncEntry 79 lt s ot gt lt connector gt 79 represents the wfSyncLineNumber attribute e Token Ring get wfTokenRingEntry 66 lt s ot gt lt connector gt 66 represents the wfTokenRingLineNumber attribute e FDDI get wfFddiEntry 44 lt slot gt lt connector gt 44 represents the wfFDDILineNumber attribute B 8 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture e HSSI get wfHssiEntry 60 lt s ot gt lt connector gt 60 represents the wfHssiLineNumber attribute e ISDN B Channel get wflsdnBrilnterfaceEntry 8 lt s ot gt lt connector gt 8 represents the wflsdnBriLineNumber attribute Example 1 Enter the following to get the line number of a SYNC interface on Slot 2 Connector 1 ge
120. compare the values to determine which errors are currently occurring Use the Technician Interface to display the attributes associated with the wfAtmAlcCopDataPath object The Quick Get path to this group is wfLine gt wfAtmInterfaceGroup gt wfAtmLinkModule gt wfAtmAlcCopDataPathTable These attributes contain the statistics showing how much data the link module is transmitting Display these attributes again after 1 minute and compare the values to determine how much data the link module is currently transmitting 5 3 Troubleshooting Routers Refer to one of the following sections if it applies to your problem Dropped Frames ATM VC Failed Message 23 Upper Layer Protocols Failing to Pass Packets Dropped Frames ATMVC Troubleshoot as follows 1 Enter the following command to display the value of the wfAtmAlcXmtPacketClips attribute get wfAtmAlcDrvEntry 29 Enter this command again in 1 minute to determine whether the ATM port is dropping frames because of congestion on the outgoing queue Enter the following command to display the value of the wfAtmAlcCopRevClipPackets attribute get wfAtmAlcCopDataPathEntry 11 Enter this command again in 1 minute to determine whether the ATM port is dropping frames because of congestion on the incoming queue Determine which upper layer protocols configured to run on the same port are receiving data Use Packet Capture and a networ
121. controller chip does not retransmit the frame This could indicate a bad transceiver cable bad transceiver or bad hub port wfCSMACDFcsErrorRx This shows the number of frames Ethernet dropped upon receipt across this CSMACD line because the Ethernet controller chip detected a check sequence checksum error The cause is usually physical Make sure the cable connections are firm Test the cables wfCSMACDAIlignErrorRx This shows the number of frames dropped upon receipt across this CSMACD line because the Ethernet controller chip detected a frame alignment error An incoming frame contained a non integer multiple of eight bits and a checksum error If an incoming frame contains a non integer multiple of eight bits but does not have a checksum error it does not increase this count When this count is incrementing the cause is usually physical Make sure the cable connections are firm Test the cables wfCSMACDLackRescErrorRx This shows the number of receiver lack of resource errors Indicates the number of times the router dropped packets it received because of a lack of buffers The possibility that some lack of resource errors occur is likely especially when the router boots If this number increases to a high rate such as 15 minute for an extended period it may indicate a problem 5 8 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem Check the wfKernelEntry for the slot where the problem is occurring to determine wheth
122. ction 7 8 Troubleshooting a Site Manager Problem Cannot Allocate Colormap Message The Site Manager cannot allocate any colors for its display because another process on the SPARCstation is using them Set the background to a single color or terminate some other background process UNIX Workstation Generating Core Dumps Separate one core dump into smaller files and send them to the Bay Networks Technical Response Center as follows 1 Issue the gdb c core command This command fails if you do not specify the name of an executable file but the path and name of the file that was executing appears 2 Issue one of the following commands gdb c core lt pathname gt or gdb lt pathname gt core lt pathname gt is the path and name of the executable file displayed in Step 1 3 Refer to Chapter 8 for instructions on how to send the files to the Bay Networks Technical Response Center 7 9 Chapter 8 Getting Help This chapter includes the following sections Reporting a Problem to the Bay Networks Technical Response Center Sending and Retrieving Files to and from Bay Networks Reporting a Problem to the Bay Networks Technical Response Center This section identifies the information we need when you call to report a problem Prepare to answer the following questions to help us expedite a solution to your problem 1 aD WF What is the site ID This number allows us to track your problem
123. d 1 or deleted 2 The Disable attribute reveals whether the protocol is enabled 1 or disabled 2 Ping your interface address Ping the next hop address listed in the routing table for the network on which the remote host resides 6 8 10 11 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Make sure that the ICMP echo outs statistic is increasing for the IP interface Use the ping p command to trace the path the ping is taking look for loops and determine whether the packet s TTL time to live field times out The message Unreachable indicates that IP does not have a route to the network in the routing table and cannot issue a ping request The message Does not respond indicates that the router did not receive a response to the ping request Check the cabling on the local and remote devices Make sure the application is running on the local and remote devices Make sure the circuit is enabled and up Make sure the interface is enabled and up Make sure the next hop address in the routing table a Is its own interface address for any directly connected network b Is the address of another router s interface on a directly connected network for any non directly connected network Ping Does Not Work Complete the instructions in the sections that apply Router Cannot Ping Another Local Device Router Cannot Ping Endstation but Can Ping Other Endstations on the Same Segment Endstat
124. d bisynchronous packets contain a 4 byte prefix that consists of internal information This prefix is not present in the packets as they appear on the wire The software uses the prefix to calculate an offset into the packet for filtering An example of a hexadecimal display of a bisynchronous packet follows Pkt 1 01 01 94 03 17 56 284 BISYNC 9 Tx 00000000 00 00 07 52 40 40 7f 7f 2d Frame Relay Frame relay does not have a special data link filter offset If you configure a data link filter set the offset to 0 The data link filter works the same way that the MAC filter works An example of a hexadecimal display of a frame relay packet follows Pkt 10 04 22 94 08 10 24 706 FR 45 Rx 00000000 04 01 03 00 80 00 80 c2 00 Oe 00 00 00 00 00 80 00000010 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00000020 00 00 Oc 80 05 00 00 14 00 02 00 Of 00 9e 00 De B 50 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Frame Relay Switch and SMDS Switch The Frame Relay Switch and SMDS Switch work the same way as described in the Frame Relay and SMDS sections LAPB The LAPB Link Access Procedure Balanced protocol currently does not have a special data link filter offset If you configure a data link filter set the offset to 0 The data link filter works the same way that the MAC filter works An example of a hexadecimal display of a LAPB packet follows Pkt 7 07 20 95 14 22 17 820 LAPB 5 Rx 00
125. dule If you convert the number of bytes to hexadecimal format and add it to the PC code to the left the number equals the PC code of the next module in memory 3 15 Troubleshooting Routers Determining which protocol owns a task can help you determine which protocols are using the most memory To do this compare the PC code of the wfKernelEntry attribute with the starting PC codes in the loadmap display Determine which PC code in the loadmap display is the next higher number compared with the number in the wfKernelEntry display and which is the next lower number The protocol associated with the higher number owns the task Example The following illustration shows another portion of the response to the get wfKernelEntry 2 command get wfKernelEntry 2 wfKernelEntry wfKernelMemOwnerTask6 2 315F7F08 To make comparisons easier the following illustration of the loadmap reorganizes the entries by PC code You can determine that the PC code 315F7F08 is a higher number than the PC code associated with the vines exe software module and that it is lower than the next highest PC code in the display hdlc exe Therefore the task is a VINES task loadmap 2 Loadmap from SLOT 2 gt tms380 exe 0x3158ef80 0094428 gt dst exe 0x315f3730 0004244 gt vines exe Ox315f47e0 0121448 gt hdlc exe 0x31612260 0058496 gt ftp exe 0x3164d6e0 0042868 gt tcp exe Ox31657e
126. e Function MIB Object ID Control wfPktCaptureControl 5 2 Stop 1 Start 2 Stop Start Starts copying to a file Stop Terminates copying to a file Manually starts and stops a capture for this instance You must stop Packet Capture before you can display the packets 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 5 Capture wfPktCaptureCapture 6 2 Stop 1 Start 2 Stop Indicates whether Packet Capture started or stopped 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 6 Line Number wfPktCaptureLineLineNumber 7 Set by Packet Capture code Based on the encoded value Uniquely identifies a circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 7 B 40 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Range Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Range Function MIB Object ID Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Buffer Size wfPktCaptureBufSize 8 None 1 allocates 1024 bytes 2 allocates 2048 bytes Available contiguous memory divided by 1024 Sets the size of the file stored in buffer memory in 1024 byte increments The upper limit is the maximum number of contiguous bytes of memory available on the slot You can find the maximum number of contiguous bytes by entering get wfKernelEntry 6 lt s ot no gt 6 represents the wfKernelMemoryMaxSegFree attribute If the allocation of the buffer leaves less than 200 KB of memory
127. e 43 Sending LCP Configure Request on circuit 3 55 mm dd yy 14 15 34 875 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 54 Received LCP Configure Request on circuit 3 Sending LCP Configure Ack on circuit 3 56 mm dd yy 14 15 34 992 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 55 Received LCP Configure Ack on circuit 3 57 mm dd yy 14 15 34 992 INFO SLOT lt 2 PPP Code 38 ink Establishment Phase complete on circuit 3 Starting Network Control Protocols on circuit 3 58 mm dd yy 14 15 34 992 TRACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 43 Sending IPCP Configure Request on circuit 3 59 mm dd yy 14 15 34 996 INFO SLOT 2 PPP Code 28 LCP up on circuit 3 60 mm dd yy 14 15 35 003 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 54 Received IPCP Configure Request on circuit 3 61 mm dd yy 14 15 35 007 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 63 IPCP Naking IP Address option value 0x0 with value 0x3030301 on circuit 3 Sending IPCP Configure Nak on circuit 3 66 mm dd yy 14 15 35 117 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 55 Received IPCP Configure Ack on circuit 3 67 mm dd yy 14 15 35 128 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 54 Received IPCP Configure Request on circuit 3 68 mm dd yy 14 15 35 132 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 44 Sending IPCP Configure Ack on circuit 3 69 mm dd yy 14 15 35 132 INFO SLOT 2 PPP Code 28 IPCP up on circuit 3 The following messages indicate that the Raise DTR signal causes the software to establish the link and activate the upper layer protoco
128. e Use the messages in this file to diagnose a problem with a port slot router or protocol 1 4 Introduction You can use the Technician Interface log command to display the log in the router s memory or the Events Manager tool s File gt Get Current File option to display it Refer to Event Messages for Routers and BNX Platforms for descriptions of the format and meaning of the event messages Note When using the Events Manager tool to display a log click on the Descending Order option If you do this the Events Manager displays the most recent event messages first If you display a log in ascending order and the log contains more events than the maximum that the Events Manager can open it may not be able to display the most recent events When you view a log or save it to a memory card the router combines log files from each processor into a single file and sorts the events by date and time If a fault event message appears in the log use the procedures in this guide to help you isolate and correct the problem If you cannot recover from the fault contact the Bay Networks Technical Response Center for the appropriate action to take Caution Always save a copy of the entire log to your memory card when a fault appears The router saves the log to a memory card only when you issue the Technician Interface save log lt filename gt command The format of the log file is binary If you request help from the Bay Networks Techni
129. e 21 for Transmit Filter 1 21 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFlitr1 Ref attribute e 32 for Transmit Filter 2 32 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Ref attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command lt value gt is e 1 for the first byte of the packet Specify 1 if you want the copied portion of the packet to contain Media Access Control information e 2 for data link e 3 for multicast Specify 3 if you want to use a special filter to make sure the right most bit of a byte is a 1 To specify a multicast bit for Ethernet specify 3 Then set the offset to 0 To specify a source routing bit for Token Ring specify 3 Then set the offset to 6 B 22 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Specifying the Offset Enter the following Technician Interface command to specify the number of bytes after the Reference with which to begin the comparison set wfPktCaptureEntry lt attribute _no gt lt line_no gt lt value gt commit lt attribute _no gt is e 15 for Receive Filter 1 15 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Offset attribute e 25 for Receive Filter 2 25 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Offset attribute e 20 for Transmit Filter 1 20 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFltr1 Offset attribute e
130. e gate 0x04016 0x30039a2e env 0x00000000 flags 0x1 85 mm dd yy 11 48 35 732 DEBUG 2 BOOT 3 Boot service request received from 0x1000000e 86 mm dd yy 11 48 35 740 D 0x00057 election opening 30000 87 mm dd yy 11 48 35 783 D 0 D EBUG 2 GAME 23 SOLO 000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 EBUG 2 LOADER 2 Loader starting service gate 0x00050 0x30058392 env 0x00000000 flags 0x1 88 mm dd yy 11 48 35 877 EBUG 2 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00057 election WON 0x20000000 repl b0000009 30000000 SOLO 0x00057 election CLOSING 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 93 mm dd yy 11 48 35 967 DEBUG 2 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00057 election CLOSED 0x20000000 repl b0000009 30000000 Learning Bridge LB is initializing 94 mm dd yy 11 48 35 971 INFO 2 LB 2 Service initializing 95 mm dd yy 11 48 36 006 DEBUG 2 LB 63 CCT 811521904 update gate initializing Slot 3 is loading the router software image from slot 2 97 mm dd yy 11 48 36 050 DEBUG 3 BOOT 21 Server on slot 2 chosen for BB boot transaction 104 mm dd yy 11 48 36 104 DEBUG 3 BOOT 18 BB boot transaction started start address 0x30024000 size 0x000c89e0 checksum 0x038D2F95 105 mm dd yy 11 48 36 179 DEBUG 3 BOOT 17 Client is dropping duplicate reply from server 0x2000000D server seq 0 client seq 4780 The statistic and alarm soloist gate ID 0
131. e ip exe NVFS manager Loader 0x00048 Protocol IP Redirector Slot 3 successfully loaded the router software image from Slot 2 and is starting up 134 mm dd yy transaction completed 11 48 38 259 DEBUG 3 BOOT 19 Jumping to address 0x30024000 BB boot A 7 Troubleshooting Routers DECnet successfully loaded onto Slot 2 and is initializing 135 mm dd yy 11 48 38 631 loaded successfully from 2 bn 137 mm dd yy 11 48 38 646 starting application drs exe 139 mm dd yy 11 48 38 697 initializing DEBUG 2 LOADER 30 Image drs exe exe DEBUG 2 LOADER 15 Loader address 0x304d4eb0 gate id 0x00054 INFO 2 DECnet 2 Protocol The IP RTM routing table manager is setting a bit map to indicate what slots it is running on Convert the hexadecimal number to binary format Then read the bit string from left to right The leftmost bit is always 1 The second leftmost bit is for Slot 1 the third for Slot 2 the fourth for Slot 3 and so on A map change occurs whenever the IP RTM starts up or 140 old 49 mm dd yy 11 48 38 885 new a0000049 dies on another slot DEBUG 2 IP 8 RIM self map IPX successfully loaded onto Slot 2 and the router software image closed The operating system opens and closes the router software image whenever it needs to read an executable component 141 mm dd yy 11 48 39 428 loaded successfully from 2 bn 142 mm dd y
132. e modem The router receives a response from the modem 67 mm dd yy 13 12 59 032 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 38 Connector COM1 Adapter accepted CRN command The router now waits for the modem to raise DSR It detects that the modem dropped CTS The modem does this to prevent the router from sending more data to it until it establishes a connection with the remote modem 68 mm dd yy 13 13 02 075 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_WAIT_FOR_DSR 5 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_CTS_DN 6 isdn flags 0x4008 69 mm dd yy 13 13 23 263 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_WAIT_FOR_DSR 5 The router receives a signal from the modem indicating that the connection between the modems is up 70 mm dd yy 13 13 23 267 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_CONN_IND 11 isdn flags 0x4008 71 mm dd yy 13 13 23 267 INFO SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 46 Connector COM1 Received a connect indication CNX The modem raises DSR and CTS 72 mm dd yy 13 13 23 673 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_WAIT_FOR_DSR 5 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_CTS_UP 5 isdn flags 0x4009 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_WAIT_FOR_DSR 5 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_DSR_UP 3 isdn flags 0x400b The router determines that a succe
133. e number of bytes in each packet to copy to the Packet Capture file If you want to use a Network General Sniffer to read a Packet Capture file you must set the size of the packets to a value the Sniffer supports The Sniffer currently supports the following values 32 64 128 256 and 512 they correspond to the Bay Networks router settings 1 2 4 8 or 16 Enter the following command to specify the number of bytes in each packet to copy into the Packet Capture file set wfPktCaptureEntry 9 lt ine_no gt lt value gt commit 9 represents the wfPktCapturePktSize attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command lt value gt is any number of 32 byte increments in the range 1 144 The value 1 represents 32 bytes to be saved The value 144 represents 4608 bytes to be saved Enabling Packet Capture Enter the following Technician Interface command to enable the Packet Capture software set wfPktCaptureEntry 2 lt ine_no gt 1 commit 2 represents the wfPktCaptureDisable attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command The 1 repr
134. e number of the logical line from which you want to copy packets as follows 1 Enter the following Technician Interface command to display the base line number get wfDs1E1PortMapEntry 4 lt s ot gt lt connector gt 4 represents the wfDs1E1PortMapLineNumber attribute parameter Example Enter the following to get the base line number of Connector 1 on an MCT1 T O module in Slot 2 get wfDs1E1PortMapEntry 4 2 1 In this example the response is 902101 Enter the following command to display the logical line number get wfLogicalLineEntry 7 lt base_line_number gt lt index gt 7 represents the wfLogicalLineNumber attribute parameter lt base_line_number gt is the response to the command you entered in Step 1 lt index gt is the position of the logical line on the circuit Example Enter the following to get the number of Logical Line 1 from the example in Step 1 get wfLogicalLineEntry 7 902101 1 In this example the response is 10902101 Enter the following command to create an instance set wfPktCaptureEntry 1 lt ine_no gt 1 commit The first 1 represents the wfPktCaptureDelete attribute lt line_no gt is the response to the command you entered in Step 2 To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command B 7 Troubleshooting Routers The second 1 represents the numeric code for create Example Enter the following
135. e packet If multiple BOFL breath of life errors occur on the same sending or receiving slot you may have a problem with the associated FRE processor The number 0x0f00bbbb indicates a backplane BOFL packet A backplane BOFL packet is a BOFL packet sent from one slot to another to determine whether the destination slot is running 3 17 Troubleshooting Routers Go to the appropriate section to determine which slot sent the BOFL packet e Finding the Slot That Sent a Bad Backplane BOFL Packet if the number OxOf00bbbb is in the same location of your display as it is in Figure 3 2 e Finding the Slot That Senta Bad Packet That Was Not a BOFL Packet if the number is not in the same location Finding the Slot That Sent a Bad Backplane BOFL Packet Determine which slot sent the BOFL packet that failed as follows 1 Find the number 0x0f00bbbb 2 Find the number to right of the number 0x0f00bbbb In Figure 3 2 this number is 0x0004000A 3 Convert the last four digits of that number to decimal In the example Slot 10 sent the bad backplane BOFL packet Example Ox000A 10 4 Call the Bay Networks Technical Response Center and describe the problem Depending on whether the slot sending or receiving the packet is always the same it may be necessary to replace the processor 3 18 Troubleshooting an Operational Problem Finding the Slot That Sent a Bad Packet That Was Not a BOFL Packet Find the number o
136. e router software images are consistent and go to the next section Verifying That the Configuration Files in Each Processor Match Compare the file sizes with the backup router software image stored on the Site Manager workstation Determine which router software image is the one you want to use If you are not sure about the integrity of any of the router software images on the router or Site Manager do the following a Use the Image Builder to customize an image b Back up the images on the memory cards c Remove the images from the memory cards d Compact the memory cards Caution Do not interrupt the compaction e Transfer the image you customized to the memory cards that you want to use to store the image f Reboot the router g If this resolves the problem stop here If this does not resolve the problem go to the next section Verifying That the Configuration Files in Each Processor Match Back up the unwanted router software image Remove the unwanted image from the router s file system Determine which slots are running with the incorrect image and reset them 3 8 Troubleshooting an Operational Problem Verifying That the Configuration Files in Each Processor Match To display the source of the configuration files that are active in each processor enter the Technician Interface get wfHwEntry 26 command Or use the Statistics Quick Get tool to display the wfHardware
137. een Builder 1 20 Screen Manager 1 20 Statistics Manager 1 19 trace events 1 7 Index 8 transmission queue Tx space shortage 5 9 transmission statistics not changing 5 26 6 31 trigger B 17 B 42 U UDP port numbers for SNMP 7 3 unable to find UDP port numbers for SNMP message 7 3 unable to load the SNMP MIB message 7 4 unable to run module message 7 4 unaligned frames 5 10 underflow errors 5 19 5 20 unknown database object type can t parse cmd line message 6 22 unknown network message 1 20 6 8 upgrading from Series 5 7 6 upstream neighbor 5 13 User Screens window 1 20 V V 25bis 6 23 V 35 Raise DTR Dial Balanced 6 26 values 1 10 variables See attributes VC ATM add failed message 5 4 VCL configuration 5 2 VCs virtual circuits maximum 5 2 virtual ring ID 6 5 W w GH with gate handle 5 5 warning events 1 7 wfAppleBase 6 2 wfAtmAlcCopDataPath 5 3 wfAtmInterfaceConfEntry 5 2 wfAtmVclConfEntry 5 2 wfAtmVclStatsEntry 5 2 wfBisyncLineNumber B 8 wfchkenv command 7 3 wfchkinst command 7 3 wfCSMACDEntry 5 6 wfCSMACDLineNumber B 8 wfDIsInterfaceEntry 6 5 wfDs1E1PortMapLineNumber B 7 wfFddiEntry 5 11 wfFDDILineNumber B 8 wfFddiMacEntry 5 13 wfHssiLineNumber B 9 wfHwaActivelmageName 3 7 wfHwBase 8 1 wfHwBootPromSource 3 6 wfHwBpSerialNumber 8 1 wfHwConfigFile 3 9 wfIpBase 6 6 wfIpBaseRtEntry 6 16 wfIpInterfaceEntry 7 8 wifIpNe
138. elBufOwnerTask1 2 315910F4 wfKernelEntry wfKernelBufOwnerTask2 2 31619B04 3 14 Troubleshooting an Operational Problem wfKernelEntry wfKernelBufOwnerTask3 2 31619B04 wfKernelEntry wfKernelMemOwnerTask1 2 3002923E wfKernelEntry wfKernelMemOwnerTask3 2 30081CF6 3 To determine which protocols are running enter the following Technician Interface command loadmap lt si ot_no gt Note ssue the loadmap command on the same slot on which you entered the get wiKernelEntry lt s ot_no gt command The order of the tasks change each time you boot a slot Example loadmap 2 Loadmap from SLOT 2 gt arp exe 0x31685720 0009784 gt vines exe 0x315f47e0 0121448 gt ftp exe 0x3164d6e0 0042868 gt tcp exe Ox31657e70 0057776 gt tftp exe 0x31666030 0020488 gt snmp exe 0x3166b050 0030328 gt tn exe 0x316726e0 0038424 gt ip exe 0x31687d70 0182004 gt tms380 exe 0x3158ef80 0094428 gt hdlc exe 0x31612260 0058496 gt dst exe 0x315f3730 0004244 The loadmap display shows the protocols and other executable software modules running on the slot Their associated starting PC codes are in hexadecimal format The starting PC code of each wfKernelEntry attribute is a higher number than the PC code of its associated protocol The column on the right of the loadmap display shows the number of bytes assigned to the mo
139. elnet session with a router at the same time However we do not recommend multiple Telnet sessions because the memory requirements to maintain multiple TCP connections can affect system performance For more detailed instructions on how to establish a Telnet connection to a router refer to Using Technician Interface Software To troubleshoot Telnet refer to Troubleshooting Telnet FTP and TFTP in Chapter 6 Taking a Snapshot of Your Network We recommend that you periodically gather and save the forwarding and routing tables maintained by the protocols running in each router You can use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to do this Access to this information will be helpful when you are troubleshooting problems in the future For example when troubleshooting a problem you may find the next hop address to a given destination does not match that in a table you saved previously This would help you to conclude that there may be a problem with the connection to the node that should be the next hop address You can use the Technician Interface to save tables or any other Technician Interface displays to a single file as follows 1 Access Manager mode 2 Enter the following command record open lt volume gt lt filename gt lt volume gt is the number or letter of the router s storage medium you are using to store the file lt filename gt is the name of the file you are creating to store the text that a
140. ely DCE manufacturers use inconsistent terminology for these settings When the router detects that DSR is in the on state that is receiving positive voltage it brings DTR high regardless of the state of the primary line This in turn causes the modem to dial If the router does not see any DSR 0 voltage the router will also bring DTR high This in turn causes the modem to dial 6 25 Troubleshooting Routers If the router s connection to the modem is a 44 pin synchronous interface and the modem is a master make sure the modem can send the RI ring indicator signal from Pin 22 to the router interface in the control off state negative voltage Most RS232 modems support this control signal If the modem does not support this control signal use the Configuration Manager to edit the connector of the backup line click on Modem and disable ring indicator The RS232 pin assignments are RI ring indicator Pin 22 DCD data carrier detect Pin 8 DTR data terminal ready Pin 20 DSR data set ready Pin 6 Troubleshooting V 35 Raise DTR Dial Balanced If the DTR is up when it should not be causing the modem or CSU to initiate a dial sequence do the following 1 If the router s connection to the modem or CSU is a 44 pin synchronous interface and the modem is a master make sure the modem or CSU can send the RI signal from Pin J to the router interface in the control off state Some CSUs do not support the Pin
141. emote connection to the router use the Optivity Tap application to transfer a copy of the Packet Capture file from the router and display the packets in hexadecimal summary or decoded formats B 2 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture The decoded format identifies each field in the packet and where appropriate displays its contents in English It also allows you to search packets for character strings Optivity Tap displays each packet in a readable format without requiring a Network General Sniffer Refer to Using Optivity Internetwork 6 1 or later for instructions If a local or out of band Technician Interface connection to the router is available and you can decode the hexadecimal content of the packets yourself use it to display the packets The Technician Interface shows the following information about each packet The sequential number of the packet in the file The date and time Packet Capture copied the packet The media carrying the packet The original size of the packet The direction of the packet received for incoming or transmitted for outgoing The contents of the packet in hexadecimal format The Technician Interface also allows you to Identify the first packet you want to display by specifying its sequence number in the packet capture file Limit the number of packets displayed If a DOS PC or Sun workstation can establish an FTP TFTP
142. enable Packet Capture software for Line Number 202101 set wfPktCaptureEntry 5 202101 2 commit Go to the next section B 12 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Using the Technician Interface to Display a Packet Capture File Enter the following Technician Interface command to display a Packet Capture file stored in memory pktdump lt ine_no gt s lt start gt c lt count gt lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command S lt start gt and c lt count gt are optional lt start gt is the number of the packet in the file to be displayed first If you do not specify one the Technician Interface displays Packet No 1 first lt count gt is the number of packets to display in sequential order If you do not specify one the Technician Interface displays all packets If the Packet Capture file does not contain packets the following message appears No packets captured for linenumber lt line_no gt If the Packet Capture file contains packets the contents of each packet appear as follows e The first line shows information Packet Capture recorded about the packet It includes The sequential number of the packet in the file The date and time Packet Capture copied the packet
143. er Chip ILACC Integrated Local Area Communications Controller does not retransmit the frame The length of the Ethernet cable exceeds the specified length Replace it with a compliant cable Late collisions may signify that the Ethernet LAN exceeds the length of the 802 3 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers specifications wfCSMACDExcessvCollnTx This shows the number of excessive collisions The software declares an excessive collision when 16 successive attempts to transmit a frame fail because each attempt results in a collision The router discards the frame and adds one to the error count This is an indication of an overloaded segment with possible storms of data Analyze this segment in order to determine what type of traffic is causing this problem 5 7 Troubleshooting Routers wfCSMACDBablErrorTx This shows the number of frames transmitted that were larger than 1518 octets BablErrorTx stands for babbling transmitter errors Despite declaring an error the Ethernet controller chip transmits the packet in its entirety Disable and enable the port and check the log for errors wfCSMACDLcarTx This shows the number of loss of carrier errors which is the number of times the port on the router lost the carrier connection during transmission to an external transceiver device After carrier loss the Ethernet controller chip continues to transmit the frame and the CSMACD entity logs an event The
144. er Upgrading a Series 5 Router After upgrading from Series 5 software to Series 7 or higher you must first boot the router with the TI CFG file and execute the backplane FN command for an FN Feeder Node or AFN Access Feeder Node backplane LN command for an LN Link Node or ALN Access Link Node or backplane CN command for a CN Concentrator Node to prepare the backplane to run the router software You must then reboot the router For detailed instructions refer to the Upgrading Routers from Version 5 to Version 10 0 guide Cannot Connect Site Manager Running on a PC Troubleshoot Site Manager connectivity failures on a PC as follows 1 Use Distinct or Chameleon to ping the local router interface If you cannot ping the router Site Manager will not communicate with it If the ping attempts fail and the number of transmitted requests and reply counters fail to increment the PC did not receive a response to the ARP request for the router s MAC address Do the following a Check the configured address of the PC the subnet mask and the gateway 7 6 Troubleshooting a Site Manager Problem Try to use Distinct or Chameleon to ping other stations on the LAN Try to ping the router port from other PCs or workstations on the LAN If the ping attempts fail but the number of transmitted requests increments the PC has a path to the requested address but failed to receive a response Do the following Verify that
145. er free buffers are available or to determine whether something on the network is preventing the router from updating its buffer lists To do this enter get wfKernelEntry lt s ot gt For example get wfKernelEntry 2 The router reports the number of available buffers in slot 2 Check for protocol storms for example from IP RIP IPX RIP and SAP and learning bridge reconverging If no buffers are available check the configuration of the line and the line utilization Increase the wf CSMACDCfgRxQueueLength to 64 and see if that helps alleviate the problem wfCSMACDTooLongErrorTx This shows the number of frames received that exceed 1518 octets The router drops the frames because of a lack of space on the transmission queue Tx The possibility that some lack of resource errors occur is likely especially when the router boots If this number increases to a high rate such as 15 minute for an extended period it may indicate a problem Check the wfKernelEntry for the slot where the problem is occurring to determine whether free buffers are available or to determine whether something on the network is preventing the router from updating its buffer lists To do this enter get wfKernelEntry lt s ot gt For example get wfKernelEntry 2 The router reports the number of available buffers in slot 2 Check for protocol storms for example from IP RIP IPX RIP and SAP and learning bridge reconverging If no buffers are availa
146. ers Example Sshow ipx route find 0x00000986 IPX Routing Table Information Destination NextHop Net NextHop Host Method Age Ticks Hops 0x00000986 0x2E000011 Ox0000C9108A7A RIP 20 2 1 Examine the entries in the routing table to make sure that the path to the destination in question is appropriate Make sure that the server you are trying to reach is in the IPX SAP table To do this use the Statistics Manager to view the IPX Base SAP Table screen or enter the following Technician Interface script command show ipx services Example Sshow ipx services IPX Service Table Information Server Service Age Hops Type QDS 0x0004 20 7 EUCLID 0x0004 60 8 SYDNEY 0x0004 60 7 CALERN 0x0004 20 8 CD_ROM 0x0004 20 9 NYC1 0x0004 60 8 To test the service s connectivity to the router enter the following Technician Interface script command show ipx ping lt service_name gt Example Sshow ipx ping NW312_LOTUS IPX Ping command by name Searching for NW312_LOTUS in server database Server NW312_LOTUS found sending ping pinging NW312_LOTUS at 0x00000986 0x000000000001 IPX ping 0x00000986 0x000000000001 is alive 6 20 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Troubleshooting OSI This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to OSI If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Troubleshoot OSI as follows 1 Use the Events M
147. es of a frame The length of the Ethernet cable exceeds the specified length Replace it with a compliant cable Troubleshooting an FDDI Connection This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to an FDDI connection If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Troubleshoot an FDDI connection as follows 1 Filter the log to display only messages from the FDDI entity running on the slots experiencing the problem The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eFDDI s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eFDDI s3 s4 Use the Technician Interface to look at the values of the following attributes in the wfFddiEntry object The get command is next to the attribute name Or use the wfLine gt wfFddiTable Quick Get path to access them wfFDDI OverrunRx get wfFddiEntry 16 This shows the number of frames received with internal overrun errors The FSI FDDI System Interface chip set became overloaded and dropped packets Troubleshooting Routers wfFDDIRingOverrunRx get wfFddiEntry 21 This shows the number of LLC logical link control reception ring overrun events These errors are equivalent to Lack of Resource errors on a sync or Ethernet port Each error indicates one lost packet Troubleshoot a problem with reception ring overruns as follows Use the following command to verify how many b
148. es that the Sync software module enabled the COM2 port 33 mm dd yy 14 14 02 826 INFO SLOT 2 SYNC Code 9 Connector COM2 enabled The port completes initialization 34 mm dd yy 14 14 03 095 DEBUG SLOT 2 SYNC Code 16 Connector COM2 initialization complete Environment address 3051f040 Line record address 3052d8bc Hardware map address 30514f9c Initialization block 80007800 Receive descriptor ring 80005000 Transmit descriptor ring 80005800 35 mm dd yy 14 14 03 095 DEBUG SLOT 2 PCAP Code 67 interface became local line 202102 intf gate spawned line 202102 36 mm dd yy 14 14 03 103 DEBUG SLOT 2 PCAP Code 65 wait_state line 202102 The FSM finite state machine messages indicate that communication between the modem and the router is occurring The first FSM message shows the state the router is currently in when the FSM Event that follows occurred 37 mm dd yy 14 14 04 100 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM2 FSM State RDTR_DISCONNECTED 0 Connector COM2 FSM Event RDTR_EVENT_CCT_UP 1 isdn flags 0x0 The following messages indicate that you configured the port for Raise DTR rather than V 25bis and remind you to check the modem connection 38 mm dd yy 14 14 04 100 INFO SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 22 Connector COM2 enable requested on cct 65535 Connector COM2 Starting raise dtr mode is modem connected and turned on
149. esents the numeric code for enable Example Enter the following command to enable Packet Capture software for Line Number 202101 set wfPktCaptureEntry 2 202101 1 commit Troubleshooting Routers Starting Packet Capture Enter the following Technician Interface command to start Packet Capture set wfPktCaptureEntry 5 lt ine_no gt 1 commit 5 represents the wfPktCaptureControl attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command 1 represents the numeric code for start Example Enter the following command to start Packet Capture software for Line Number 202101 set wfPktCaptureEntry 5 202101 1 commit Go to the next section Terminating Packet Capture You must terminate Packet Capture before you can display the packets Enter the following Technician Interface command to terminate it set wfPktCaptureEntry 5 lt ine_no gt 2 commit 5 represents the wfPktCaptureControl attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command 2 represents the numeric code for stop Example Enter the following command to
150. eter setting It cannot exceed 16 Selecting the Number of Filters that Must Match Use this section if you did both of the following tasks e You configured both filters associated with a packet direction e You set the Type parameter for both filters to 1 to copy only packets that match the string Enter the following command to specify whether the packet must match both Filter 1 and Filter 2 in order for Packet Capture to copy it set wfPktCaptureEntry lt attribute _no gt lt line_no gt lt value gt commit lt attribute_no gt is e 29 for Receive Filter 1 and Receive Filter 2 29 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Group attribute e 35 for Transmit Filter 1 and Transmit Filter 2 35 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Group attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command B 24 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture lt value gt is 1 if you want Packet Capture to copy a packet if it matches either Filter 1 or Filter 2 2 if you want Packet Capture to copy a packet only if it matches both Filter 1 and Filter 2 Note Packet Capture uses this parameter only if you configure both capture lters associated with a single direction amp Configuration Examples This section shows examples of
151. etwork General Sniffer reads MCT1 Packet Capture files as synchronous files You can convert HSSI packets only if the protocol is standard synchronous such as PPP You cannot convert packets if the protocol is HPTP protocol Packet Convert does not support the bisynchronous protocol Note You must set the size of the packets to one of the values the Sniffer supports before you capture them Go to Specifying the Number of Bytes in Each Packet to Copy for instructions Convert a Packet Capture file as follows 1 Retrieve a copy of the file from the router Go to the following sections for instructions Getting the Name of the Packet Capture File Using FIP to Transfer the File Using TFTP to Transfer the File or Using XMODEM to Transfer the File 2 Make sure the filename does not have an extension and is nor more than 8 characters 3 Access the directory containing the Packet Convert directory 4 Enter the following command to convert the file pktconv lt filename gt Packet Capture creates a new file that you can copy to a DOS formatted diskette and insert in the Sniffer The name of the file begins with the Packet Capture filename and ends with the extension the Sniffer requires Examples e Fora CSMA CD Packet Capture file named PCAP0400 you enter pktconv pcap0400 Packet Convert creates a Sniffer file named PCAP0400 ENC e Fora TOKEN Packet Capture file named PCAP0300 you ente
152. f the slot that sent the packet by looking at the hexadecimal number that is in the same position as the number that is in bold in Figure 3 3 mm dd yy 04 58 56 141 122 57 1 4 GAME W bad fwd receive buffer checksum mm dd yy 04 58 56 141 122 57 1 4 GAME D buf 0x801da800 0x00000000 0x8 0x8 0x8 0x8 0x8 0x8 0x8 0x80 Figure 3 3 1da87c 1da88c 1da89c lda8ac lda8bc 0x00050004 0x8b51704d Oxf300001c 0x20009000 0x39303238 0x5645525f 0x0022d300 0xa0000012 0x8638002b 0xa4850452 0x41343835 0x41353039 1ce400 Oxffc00011 0x007c04a4 0x306da810 lda86c 0x76c00000 0x221a090b Oxb9 11240 0x0002030c 0x30313032 0x00000000 xsum 0xd7781lec8 0x76c00000 0x0000012 O0xc000000 0x3130303 0x5053455 0x00000000 Finding the Slot Number When the Message Does Not Reference a Backplane BOFL In the following example the hexadecimal number in question is the 0xa000 portion of the number 0xa0000012 Convert the number to its binary equivalent Example 0xa000 1010 0000 0000 0000 In the binary representation of the number a value of 0 means that the slot did not originate the message a value of 1 means that the slot did originate the message Ignore the leftmost digit The digit to the right of the leftmost digit is the value for Slot 1 the next digit to the right is the value for Slot 2 and the next digit to the right is the va
153. fHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource wfHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource int 8 10 40 freboot exe int 8 10 40 freboot exe int 8 10 40 freboot exe int 8 10 40 freboot exe ae WN 2 Refer to Upgrading Routers from Version 5 to Version 10 0 to make sure the boot PROM versions satisfy the software version requirements Making Sure the Router Software Image Is Correct for the Router Make sure that the router software image on the router is compatible with the type of router you are using Refer to the Upgrading Routers book that applies to your router software for a list of the router software image names and the associated router types Making Sure All Slots Use the Same Router Software Image and Configuration File Different versions of router software image and configuration files within a router can cause many types of serious problems The best way to avoid these problems is to maintain consistency among the router software images in multiple memory cards and make sure that if you make a configuration change to a configuration file on one memory card that you copy the file to any other memory cards that have a file with the same name 3 6 Troubleshooting an Operational Problem However if you specify the router software image and configuration files when booting the router all processors boot with the specified router software image and configuration file If the router has more than one memory card refer to the fo
154. g Network Control Protocols on circuit 2 IPCP down on circuit 2 LCP down on circuit 2 94 mm dd yy 13 13 51 552 INFO SLOT 2 SYNC Code 13 The following message is normal after a dial on demand connection terminates 95 mm dd yy 13 13 51 556 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Demand line failed for circuit 2 sw_dd_line_fail set in use circuit to zero for com 1 The router completes the orderly termination of the dial on demand link by re initializing the port 96 mm dd yy 13 13 51 572 INFO SLOT 2 SYNC Code 9 Connector COM1 enabled 97 mm dd yy 13 13 51 841 DEBUG SLOT 2 SYNC Code 16 Connector COM1 initialization complete Environment address 3051ea30 Line record address 3052e03c Hardware map address 30526e3c Initialization block 80007c00 Receive descriptor ring 80006000 Transmit descriptor ring 80006800 98 mm dd yy 13 13 51 841 DEBUG SLOT 2 PCAP Code 67 interface became local line 202101 intf gate spawned line 202101 99 mm dd yy 13 13 51 849 DEBUG SLOT 2 PCAP Code 65 wait_state line 202101 100 mm dd yy 13 13 52 846 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_ DISCONNECTED 0 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_CCT_UP 1 isdn flags 0x0 101 mm dd yy 13 13 52 846 INFO SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 22 Connector COM1 enable requested on cct 65535 102 mm dd yy 13 13 53 406 DEBUG SLOT 2 SW
155. g Telnet FTP and TETP e Ping Does Not Work e Troubleshooting Routing Information Protocol RIP e Troubleshooting Open Shortest Path First OQSPFY 6 7 Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting Telnet FTP and TFTP The message Unknown Network Or Network Unreachable indicates that the device does not have a path to the requested network If the sender and the target are on the same LAN verify that the network IP address and subnet mask are the same for both interfaces If this message appears on a UNIX workstation issue the netstat r command at the workstation The workstation displays the contents of the routing table along with any default routes present Check the port s subnet mask which determines whether networks are local or remote If the workstation is in routed mode check the daemon s configuration Troubleshoot Telnet FTP or TFTP as follows 1 Use the Events Manager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for the application The Technician Interface command is log fftwid e lt 7ELNET FTP TFTP gt Example If you are filtering events from Telnet you enter log fftwid eTELNET Enter the following command to check the base records get lt wfTelnet wfFtp wfTftp gt 0 Example get wfTelnet 0 The Delete attribute appears only in the Telnet and FTP base records It reveals whether the protocol is create
156. g command to specify the size of the Packet Capture file stored in memory set wfPktCaptureEntry 8 lt ine_no gt lt value gt commit 8 represents the wfPktCaptureBufSize attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command lt value gt is any number of 1024 byte increments in the range 1 to the number of bytes of available contiguous memory minus 200 KB 1024 The value 1 represents 1024 bytes of memory allocated for the Packet Capture file The value 2 represents 2048 bytes To calculate the value subtract 200 KB from the lowest number displayed in response to the get command you entered in Step 1 Divide this by 1024 The answer is the maximum value that we recommend that you enter The less memory you allocate to Packet Capture the lower the chance that the processor will reset because of a memory problem However you do need to allocate enough memory to store the packets you want to capture If less than 200 KB of free memory remains after Packet Capture starts it sends a warning message to the log If errors occur after you start Packet Capture stop it and allocate less memory B 10 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Specifying the Number of Bytes in Each Packet to Copy You must specify th
157. ge Filters 2 0 0 0 ce ssssceseressneeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 Table 1 2 Example of an Imaginary Object Named House cccceceeseeeeseeees 1 12 Table 3 1 ASN Front Fonel LEDS 2cicecacstoonshyiiccensted kicenueedua tenertesed cent iea utes ceiicomds 3 4 Table 3 2 ASN SPX Rear Panel LEDS sasssctisseccsteadeaassccearearsaetipaarsssasi saaaveterrrssieters 3 4 Table 3 3 Memory Configuration System Software Limitations ccceee 3 13 Table 4 1 Values of Media State AWIDUISS sccciisicicesscarssncissianaejecendeeacucensneniedcens 4 2 Table 5 1 Error Codes in the ATM VC mod failed Log Message n 5 5 Table B 1 Determining the Slot Mask cceseeeee E ar B 5 labeBb2 Siructureota Line NUMBER ionainn ea B 55 xiii About This Guide If you are responsible for isolating and solving problems associated with Bay Networks routers read this guide Audience This guide assumes You have experience configuring and managing Bay Networks routers You have a working knowledge of Site Manager and the Technician Interface You have a working knowledge of the protocols running on your routers Before You Begin Before using this guide to solve a problem refer to the following documents Release Notes for Router Software Version 10 0 Release Notes for Site Manager Software Version 4 0 Known Anomalies Router Software 10 0 and Site Manager 4 0 This manual assumes that you also have access to the following Bay
158. hat connect to the same ring 5 wrap AB 6 through This is the normal non wrap operating state for a dual attached station 7 local A 8 local B 9 local AB 10 local S 11 cwrap A This state indicates that FDDI wrapped the A port of the FDDI link or net module because the B port is not receiving data Make sure the B port cable is not disconnected and the port is functional One of the two fibers leading into the B port may be broken Troubleshoot the cable 12 cwrap B This state indicates that FDDI wrapped the B port of the FDDI link or net module because the A port is not receiving data Make sure the A port cable is not disconnected and the port is functional Troubleshoot the cable Use the Technician Interface to look at the values of the following attributes in the wfFddiMacEntry object The get command is next to the attribute name Or use this Quick Get path to access them wfLine gt wfFddiGroup gt wfMacGroup gt wfFddiMacTable wfFddiMacUpstreamNbr get wfFddiMacEntry 4 This shows the MAC address of the upstream neighbor in the ring Use it to determine whether the router wrapped the ring wfFddiMacDownstreamNbr get wfFddiMacEntry 5 This shows the MAC address of the downstream neighbor in the ring Use it to determine whether the router wrapped the ring 5 13 Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting a Frame Relay Connection This section assumes that you have isolated a problem
159. ho L2 LSPDB get wfOsiL2LspHdrEntry 1 To display the dynamic adjacency ID use the osiadjs alias 6 22 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem The alias definition is osiadjs echo Dynamic Adjacencies get wfOsiDynAdjEntry 9 To display the path or router ID use the osillroutes or osil2routes alias depending on the level 1 or 2 The alias definitions are e osillroutes echo L1 Fwd Routes get wfOsiL1RouteEntry 1 e osil2routes echo L2 Fwd Routes get wfOsiL2RouteEntry 1 Troubleshooting Switched Services This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to the switched services If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Troubleshoot switched services as follows 1 2 Use the Events Manager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for the modem interface and PPP entities running on the slots in question The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eMODEMIF ePPP s lt si ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eMODEMIF ePPP s3 s4 Inspect the log as follows a Ifthe connection is V 25bis make sure that the modem sent the call request number CRN b Make sure the telephone number is correct If the modem sent the CRN the telephone number is correct and the modem did not dial check the cabling and configurat
160. hows the filename starting offset load address and number of bytes of each dynamically loadable application running on the slot in question If a processor does not reside on a slot the message loadmap no reply from slot s specified appears Determine how your processor is currently using local and global memory as follows 1 To determine how the slot in question divides memory into global and local types enter the following Technician Interface command get wfKernParamEntry lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt is the slot number of the processor module in the router Use Slot 1 if you have an AN Access Node To display how the router is using memory enter the following Technician Interface command get wfKernelEntry lt s ot_no gt The values that the Technician Interface displays include How much memory is free The starting PC program counter that is address location in memory of the task The Technician Interface displays each task as a PC code in the wfKernelEntry wfKernelBufOwnerTask lines The number of buffers allocated for each task Example The most important lines in this example are in bold This example shows only the most important lines in the display It shows only a portion of what actually appears get wfKernelEntry 2 wfKernelEntry wfKernelSlot 2 2 wfKernelEntry wfKernelMemorySize 2 23752016 wfKernelEntry wfKernelMemoryFree 2 21139840 wfKernelEntry wfKern
161. ializing the port 77 mm dd yy 14 15 57 054 INFO SLOT 2 SYNC Code 9 Connector COM2 enabled 78 mm dd yy 14 15 57 364 DEBUG SLOT 2 SYNC Code 16 Connector COM2 initialization complete Environment address 3051f040 Line record address 3052d8bc Hardware map address 30514f9c Initialization block i 80007800 Receive descriptor ring 80005000 Transmit descriptor ring 80005800 79 mm dd yy 14 15 57 364 DEBUG SLOT 2 PCAP Code 67 interface became local line 202102 80 mm dd yy 14 15 57 368 DEBUG SLOT 2 PCAP Code 68 A 21 Troubleshooting Routers intf gate spawned line 202102 The router returns to a wait_state a state in which it is waiting for data 81 mm dd yy 14 15 57 372 DEBUG SLOT 2 PCAP Code 65 wait_state line 202102 82 mm dd yy 14 15 58 401 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM2 FSM State RDTR_DISCONNECTED 0 Connector COM2 FSM Event RDTR_EVENT_CCT_UP 1 isdn flags 0x0 83 mm dd yy 14 15 58 401 INFO SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 22 Connector COM2 enable requested on cct 65535 Connector COM2 Starting raise dtr mode is modem connected and turned on Connector COM2 Circuit has been brought up Dial on Demand V 25bis The following log shows a successful dial on demand connection between the COM1 port in Slot 2 and a modem configured for V 25bis These messages appear only when you click on the port config
162. ian Interface to display the log without filtering explicitly by the severity type the log displays only fault warning and informational events If you are using the Events Manager to view a log and you change the filters you must refresh or redisplay the event log to use the new filters You can specify filters for more than one severity The Events Manager s Filter window allows you to click on more than one filtering option and the Technician Interface allows you to enter more than one filter The following example displays all of the events log ffwtid 1 7 Troubleshooting Routers You can use the Technician Interface or Events Manager to combine the filters For example you enter the following command to display all IP events from 11 19 on 1 22 96 log elP d01 22 96 t11 19 ffwtid You can filter more than one software entity slot number and severity and combine filter types The following example filters all severities from Ethernet and IP running on Slots 3 and 4 log ffwtid eCSMACD elP s3 s4 Refer to the following guides for more detailed information about using the event log e Managing Routers and BNX Platforms e Using Technician Interface Software e Event Messages for Routers and BNX Platforms Understanding Debug Messages in the Event Log One event severity type that raises many questions is Debug Debug messages help Bay Networks engineers troubleshoot problems Many Debug messages refer t
163. ication Each slot is in one of four different states DOWN SYNC ACTIV active and HOLD A 2 Reading the Event Log Each slot transmits BOFL requests via the backplane to the other slots in the router in order to determine which slots are active Each slot transmits 16 BOFL requests per second The operating system logs the status of each slot as follows e Ifa slot does not hear from a remote slot within 4 seconds s 64 BOFL requests it logs the state of that slot as DOWN e Ifa slot receives some BOFL responses from a remote slot or does not receive all that it should have it logs the state of that slot as SYNC e Ifa slot receives all of the necessary BOFL responses from a remote slot that it previously determined as DOWN or SYNC it logs a message stating that the remote slot is reconnected to the backplane For example in Message 40 Slot 3 declares that Slot 2 is back up 30 mm dd yy 11 48 19 153 DEBUG 3 GAME 74 REMOTE 2 FSM FLOW gt HOLD 00014a TIME OUT last 0000f6 31 mm dd yy 11 48 19 153 WARN 3 GAME 8 slot 2 became disconnected 32 mm dd yy 11 48 21 273 DEBUG 2 GAME 73 REMOTE 3 FSM FLOW gt ACTIV 0000 9 90000007 00012d 20000000 00000000 REMOTE 3 FSM ACTIV gt DOWN 0000f9 90000007 00014d 00000000 20000000
164. inate itself when it matches a portion of an incoming or outgoing packet to a hexadecimal number or character string that you specify After Packet Capture terminates you can choose one of the following options to examine the file To take advantage of the maximum number of features for viewing a file select the first option in the list that identifies the tools that you have available e Ifa Network General Sniffer is available use the Optivity Internetwork 6 1 Tap software FTP TFTP or XMODEM to transfer a copy of the Packet Capture file from the router to a UNIX workstation or DOS PC You can then use one of the following methods to convert the file for processing by a Network General Sniffer Use Tap to convert the file on a UNIX workstation Use the Packet Convert utility to convert the file on a Sun workstation or DOS PC Save the converted file on a DOS formatted diskette and insert the diskette in a Network General Sniffer for analysis Using a Network General Sniffer to view a Packet Capture file allows you to view each packet in a readable format If one is available we recommend that you use it to read Packet Capture files Refer to Using Optivity Internetwork 6 1 for the Tap instructions or to this appendix for the Packet Convert instructions and refer to the Network General Sniffer manual to read the file e If Optivity Internetwork 6 1 or later is available and you can use it to establish a r
165. ings earlier in this appendix B 35 Troubleshooting Routers Example list wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureDelete 1 wfPktCaptureDisable 2 wfPktCaptureState 3 wfPktCaptureFname 4 wfPktCaptureControl 5 wfPktCaptureCapture 6 wfPktCaptureLineNumber 7 wfPktCaptureBufSize 8 wfPktCapturePktSize 9 wfPktCaptureDirection 10 wfPktCaptureCount 11 wfPktCaptureRxTrigger 12 wfPktCaptureTxTrigger 13 wfPktCaptureRxFltrlType 14 wfPktCaptureRxFltrloOffset 15 wfPktCaptureRxFltrlRef 16 wfPktCaptureRxFltr1lSize 17 wfPktCaptureRxFltrlMatch 18 wfPktCaptureTxFltriType 19 wfPktCaptureTxFltrlOffset 20 wfPktCaptureTxFltrlRef 21 wfPktCaptureTxFltr1lSize 22 wfPktCaptureTxFltrlMatch 23 wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Type 24 wfPktCaptureRxFltr20ffset 25 wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Ref 26 wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Size 27 wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Match 28 wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Group 29 wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Type 30 wfPktCaptureTxFltr20ffset 31 wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Ref 32 wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Size 33 wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Match 34 wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Group 35 B 36 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Packet Capture Parameter Descriptions The following sections describe each parameter its equivalent number and its possible values e Basic Parameters 6 Trigger Parameters e Filter Parameters Note Packet Capture reads a
166. ion Cannot Ping the Remote Interface on the Router 73 Endstation Can Ping Devices on the Same Segment but Cannot Ping the Router Endstation Can Ping Local and Remote Interfaces on the Router but Cannot Ping a Remote Station Note The source address used in any ping ICMP echo request originating from the router is always the IP address of the router s outgoing port 6 9 Troubleshooting Routers Router Cannot Ping Another Local Device When the router cannot ping another device on the network it does not necessarily mean that the network or router is down If the device you are trying to ping never responded successfully to a ping request before because it is a new endstation a new segment or a new router make sure that you configured it properly If the ping was successful at one time and is no longer successful try to isolate the problem to any recent changes in the network If you do not know of any recent changes or if you verified that they are OK do the following 1 Try to make the endstation ping itself If the endstation cannot ping itself refer to the manuals on the TCP IP stack and LAN card for that system and inspect the installation and configuration An endstation must be able to ping itself in order to receive a ping response from the network However the self ping operation is internal and has nothing to do with the network or the router Therefore an incorrectly co
167. ion of the Packets to be Copied This section describes how to change the direction of the packets to be copied By default Packet Capture copies only incoming packets B 16 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Enter the following command to change the direction of the packets that Packet Capture saves set wfPktCaptureEntry 10 lt ine_no gt lt value gt commit 10 represents the wfPktCaptureDirection attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command lt value gt is one of the following e 1 Packet Capture will copy only incoming packets e 2 Packet Capture will copy only outgoing packets e 3 Packet Capture will copy both incoming and outgoing packets Example Enter the following command to configure Packet Capture to copy both incoming and outgoing packets associated with Line Number 102101 set wfPktCaptureEntry 10 102101 3 commit Configuring a Termination Trigger By default Packet Capture terminates only when you issue the command to terminate it You can change this default so that Packet Capture terminates e When the Packet Capture file fills e Or when it matches a portion of an incoming or outgoing packet to a hexadecimal number or character string that you specify You ca
168. ion of the modem c Determine how PPP is negotiating during the connection 6 23 Troubleshooting Routers For a successful connection the control protocol on both sides of the configured demand circuits comes up and the associated events appear in the log Filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for the switched access services running on the slots in question The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eSWSERV s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eSWSERV s3 s4 Determine whether the circuit is in slave mode or master mode Filter the log to display the network layer protocol event messages and determine whether or not they are coming up Use the Technician Interface get command or the Statistics Manager Quick Get tool to examine the following MIB objects for configuration settings and errors wfPppCircuitEntry wfPppLine Entry wfPPPWhoamiEntry wfSwservOptsEntry wfSwservOutPhoneNumEntry wfModemlfEntry If you are running IP and RIP or OSPF for dial backup do the following a Ping across the connection from the primary line If the ping fails and the router fails to establish a backup connection issue the Technician Interface show ip arp script command Determine whether you statically configured the ARP cache If you are running Frame Relay on the primary line configure an IP adjacent host
169. ions apply to your problem Troubleshoot AppleTalk problems as follows 1 Use the Events Manager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for AppleTalk The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eAT s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eAT s3 s4 Enter the following command to check the base records get wfAppleBase 0 The most important attributes are e The State attribute shows whether AppleTalk is up 1 down 2 initializing 3 or not present 4 You cannot change this setting e The Disable attribute reveals whether AppleTalk is enabled 1 or disabled 2 Check the values of the following statistics twice and compare them to determine whether AppleTalk is currently receiving and transmitting packets and generating errors e The reception and transmission statistics If the reception or transmission statistics do not change do the following Check the reception and transmission statistics of the other protocols associated with the same connector and the same slot Try disabling and enabling AppleTalk and watch the log messages to determine why the connection will not come up e The error statistics Make sure that the next hop and network you are trying to reach are in the routing table entries 6 2 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem 5 Verify the configurati
170. itly except by acceptance of an order for either Software or for a Bay Networks product Equipment that is packaged with Software Each such license is subject to the following restrictions 1 Upon delivery of the Software Bay Networks grants to licensee a personal nontransferable nonexclusive license to use the Software with the Equipment with which or for which it was originally acquired including use at any of licensee s facilities to which the Equipment may be transferred for the useful life of the Equipment unless earlier terminated by default or cancellation Use of the Software shall be limited to such Equipment and to such facility Software which is licensed for use on hardware not offered by Bay Networks is not subject to restricted use on any Equipment however unless otherwise specified on the Documentation each licensed copy of such Software may only be installed on one hardware item at any time Licensee may use the Software with backup Equipment only if the Equipment with which or for which it was acquired is inoperative Licensee may make a single copy of the Software but not firmware for safekeeping archives or backup purposes Licensee may modify Software but not firmware or combine it with other software subject to the provision that those portions of the resulting software which incorporate Software are subject to the restrictions of this license Licensee shall not make the resulting software available f
171. ity such as IP Or it may be to create children gates responsible for their own processes A parent gate keeps track of its child gate by remembering its logical address called a gate handle If you configure the router to run IP the gate responsible for creating protocols creates an IP gate This gate in turn creates gates for IP processes such as RIP or OSPF And RIP and OSPF gates create gates of their own to handle RIP and OSPF processes Thus each time the operating system starts it creates gates that form a hierarchy resembling a family tree If the software detects a problem it instructs the parent gate to kill eliminate from memory the gate associated with the problem and recreate it If the problem reoccurs the software instructs the grandparent gate to kill its children and recreate them When a gate dies is eliminated all of its children also die The grandparent recreates the parent gate and the parent gate recreates its children This process expands to the next generation and continues until the problem becomes resolved or until the software entity reinitializes GAME generates a Fault event message when it reinitializes a software entity This system of creating and killing gates allows the software to try to correct a problem but minimizes the impact to the network because it resets only the components that appear to be associated with the problem Go to A if you would like to view examples and explanations
172. k analyzer to determine which type of data is on the line Failed Message If the message ATM VC mod failed appears the VC virtual circuit request to the driver failed The message VC ATM add failed usually appears afterwards Do the following 1 Check the VC definition in the configuration file and make sure that you defined the AAL ATM adaptation layer type as AAL 5 Determine whether an oversubscription of the port cell rate occurred Make sure you used a VCI Virtual Channel Identifier number greater than 32 5 4 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem 4 Match the error code in the message to the error code column in Table 5 1 and perform the associated instructions Table 5 1 Error Codes in the ATM VC mod failed Log Message Error Code Meaning Instructions ATM_ERR_BAD_VC The driver is already using the VPI VCI Virtual Path Identifier Virtual Channel Identifier Use a different channel E ATM_ERR_NO_RESOURC The bandwidth is insufficient to satisfy the request Lower the cell rates ATM_ERR_NO_VC_AVAIL The maximum no of VCs are in already in use Increase the maximum no of VCs ATM_ERR_COP_ERR The coprocessor returned an Document the error and error call the Bay Networks Technical Response Center Upper Layer Protocols Failing to Pass Packets If the upper layer protocols are failing to pass packets
173. l ULI stands for Upper Layer Indicator A 20 Reading the Event Log 70 mm dd yy 14 15 35 136 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM2 FSM State RDTR_WAIT_FOR_ULI 3 Connector COM2 FSM Event RDTR_EVENT_ULI_IND 8 isdn flags 0x22e 71 mm dd yy 14 15 56 980 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM2 FSM State RDTR_CONNECTED 4 Connector COM2 FSM Event RDTR_EVENT_DSR_DN 4 isdn flags 0x224 The router detected that the modem dropped DSR indicating the remote link is lost 72 mm dd yy 14 15 56 980 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 32 Connector COM2 DSR lost connection closed The router exceeds its inactivity timeout threshold and drops DTR to terminate the connection to the modem 73 mm dd yy 14 15 56 980 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 isdn_down_cct calling drop_dtr The router disables PPP 74 mm dd yy 14 15 56 980 INFO SLOT 2 PPP Code 31 Stopping Network Control Protocols on circuit 3 IPCP down on circuit 3 LCP down on circuit 3 75 mm dd yy 14 15 57 035 INFO SLOT 2 SYNC Code 13 Connector COM2 LLC1 service withdrawn The following message is normal after a dial on demand connection terminates 76 mm dd yy 14 15 57 039 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Demand line failed for circuit 3 sw_dd_line_fail set in use circuit to zero for com 2 The router completes the orderly termination of the dial on demand link by re init
174. l Response Center Power Problem Blown Fuse Troubleshoot a power problem as follows 1 Make sure the power cable is firmly connected to the router and the electrical outlet Make sure that the Ethernet transceivers have power If they do not call the Bay Networks Technical Response Center If the router is a BCN Backbone Concentrator Node or CN Concentrator Node determine whether the circuit breaker broke the power circuit If the router is a BCN or BLN Backbone Link Node check the power supply LEDs If a single power supply LED is off and the power supplies are modular make sure that the connection is firm Otherwise replace the power supply module If more than one power supply LED is off remove one power supply If all of the remaining power supply LEDs light replace the one you removed Otherwise reinsert it and remove another Repeat this until you find the problem power supply The following events may cause a fuse to blow A power surge You hot swapped a link module that does not satisfy the minimum version requirements for hot swap support To determine whether the link module satisfies hot swap requirements refer to the Implementing guide shipped with the latest upgrade package or to the Compatibility Matrix document from the Bay Networks bulletin board or contact your Bay Networks sales representative 3 2 Troubleshooting an Operational Problem LEDs Not Lit The LEDs
175. le When the remote slot Slot 4 receives a loop up or loop down command the remote loopback yellow LED lights and the following messages appear in the log 2 mm dd yy 08 56 17 563 INFO SLOT 4 DS1El1 Code 55 Connector COM2 received loop up code 18 mm dd yy 09 08 47 872 INFO SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 56 Connector COM2 received loop down code 3 mm dd yy 10 31 12 638 INFO SLOT 2 IB Code 5 wfDs1ElActionEntry 5 905102 set to 5 4 mm dd yy 10 31 12 683 INFO SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 30 Connector COM1 Unscheduled FDL message received type Payload Loopback Activate 5 mm dd yy 10 31 12 687 INFO SLOT 4 DS1El Code 22 A 28 Connector CO LIN Connector CO 6 mm dd 1 Logical yy 10 31 2 Logical Reading the Event Log 7 mm dd yy 10 31 33 109 DEBUG dp_line_map Line GH 0x8400b4e3 8 mm dd yy 10 31 33 113 I Connector CO 2 Logical Line 1 LI 9 mm dd yy 10 31 33 113 DEBUG Last line 0x400b4e3 in DP killing CC gate for 10 mm dd yy 10 31 Interface 4 1 2 1 down 11 mm dd yy 10 31 Circuit 3 down 14 mm dd yy 10 31 FWD 5 60f0 84000053 NAK 3c000000 15 mm dd yy 10 31 Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical 16 mm dd yy 10 31 Connector COM2 Logical Connector COM2 Logical Connector
176. led number are correct If the ISDN connection is present filter the PPP event messages to verify that the PPP negotiation succeeded To do this from the Technician Interface enter log ePPP ffdwit Verify that the CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol or PAP Password Authentication Protocol data in the wfSwservOptsEntry matches that of the remote router s wfPppWhoamiEntry If it is CHAP make sure the Secret is identical on both sides of the link Verify that the protocol network numbers and adjacent host information are correct If using call screening on incoming calls verify that the numbers in the Dialup gt Incoming Phone Numbers table match those in the Call Setup messages received 6 29 Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting Other Networking Protocols This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to a network protocol If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Troubleshoot network layer protocols not mentioned previously in this chapter as follows 1 Use the Events Manager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for the protocol in question The Technician Interface command is log fftwid e lt ENTITY gt s lt slot_no gt When specifying the lt ENTITY gt use uppercase letters Refer to Event Messages for Routers and BNX Platforms for a list of the entities Example If you
177. light emitting diodes on a FRE Fast Routing Engine SRM System Resource Module or link or net module may fail to light for the following reasons e The Ethernet transceivers on a slot lost power e A slot is unavailable e The backbones are not connected e The router blew a fuse e The hardware module is not attached firmly to the backplane Look at the GAME messages in the event log to determine the cause of the problem If any of these events occurred and a slot is no longer functional please call the Bay Networks Technical Response Center to report the problem Router Won t Boot Troubleshoot as follows 1 If the router uses a memory card or a diskette make sure that you inserted it properly Refer to the appropriate router maintenance guide for instructions Note f you attempt to boot a router without a storage medium or attempt to boot a router that does not have the proper router software image and configuration files it will fail to boot and will stay in the boot mode The memory cards ship separately you must install one unless the router is an Access product 2 Wait 5 minutes If the router s file storage mediums do not contain a configuration file named config the router boots automatically with the ti cfg file after five minutes The ti cfg file contains the minimum configuration required to boot the router and allow you to use the Technician Interface to access it Make sure you name the co
178. llowing sections to make sure the router software image and configuration files in each processor are the same ec Verifying That the Router Software Images in Each Processor Match e Verifying That the Configuration Files in Each Processor Match Verifying That the Router Software Images in Each Processor Match To display the source of the router software images active in each processor enter the Technician Interface get wfHwEntry 28 command or use the Statistics Quick Get tool to display the wfHardwareConfig gt wfHwTable gt wfHwActivelmageName values Example Slot Name of location of Source image on the processor volume of source in router image in use volume get wfHwEntry 28 wfHwEntry wfHwActivelImag wfHwEntry wfHwActivelImag wfHwEntry wfHwActivelImag wfHwEntry wfHwActivelImag wfHwEntry wfHwActivelImag All settings for all processors must be the same In this example the processors in Slots 2 through 5 are operating with the router software image named bn exe which came from the file system in Volume 2 Here Slot 1 does not have a configuration because it does not contain a processor module 3 7 Troubleshooting Routers If the slots are operating with router software images from different volumes do the following 1 Display the directory for each slot and compare the file sizes of the router software images If they are the same size assume that th
179. lue for Slot 3 etc The right most digit is meaningless because at most the router has only 14 slots In this example Slot 2 sent the message that failed 3 19 Troubleshooting Routers Call the Bay Networks Technical Response Center and describe the situation Depending on whether the slot sending or receiving the packet is always the same it may be necessary to replace the FRE processor Fault Message If a software entity experiences a fault and fails to recover do the following 1 Disable and re enable the port Watch the event log Stop here if the software entity recovers Reset the slot Watch the event log Stop here if the software entity recovers Press the Reset button on the front panel for no more than one second This initiates a warm boot procedure which will keep the log intact Caution Avoid using the diags command to boot a router after it has crashed If you do so or you remove and reinstall power the diagnostics software overwrites the log This prevents you from accessing it to determine the cause of the problem Watch the event log Stop here if the software entity recovers Save the log to a file and transfer it using FTP File Transfer Protocol or TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol to the Bay Networks host or set the router up for modem access so that Bay Networks can dial in and look at it Go to Chapter 8 for instructions Call the Bay Networks Technical Response Center to repor
180. lues Because the Quick Get tool is fast and does not require an initial setup of the screens this manual refers you to it as an alternative to using the Technician Interface or the scripts The Quick Get tool features a Description button and a Retrieve button If you click an attribute and click Description a new window displays the description of the attribute from the MIB specification Troubleshooting Routers Using Ping If you click an attribute and click Retrieve the Site Manager retrieves and displays all of the values of that attribute You can retrieve more than one attribute at a time e The Screen Manager tool allows you to select windows of statistics from the Default Screens window which contains a list of statistics windows provided with Site Manager and Add them to the Current Screens List window so that you can launch these windows Copy them to the User Screens window so that you can customize these windows e The Launch Facility tool allows you to select from a list of the statistics windows you added to the Current Screens List window to display one When you launch a statistics window the Statistics Manager queries the router for the values and displays the values e The Screen Builder allows you to Build windows of statistics from scratch Customize statistics windows you copied to the User Screens window Refer to Managing Routers and BNX Platforms for detailed instructions on usi
181. m dd yy 11 50 47 015 DEBUG 3 OADER 28 Dynamic loader completed transaction for tcp exe 353 mm dd yy 11 50 47 032 DEBUG 3 OOADER 15 Loader starting application tcp exe address 0x304ad4d0 gate id 0x0007b 354 mm dd yy 11 50 47 061 INFO 3 TCP 5 TCP is UP 355 mm dd yy 11 50 47 086 DEBUG 2 LOADER 30 Image tcp exe loaded successfully from 2 bn exe 356 mm dd yy 11 50 47 086 DEBUG 2 NVFS 64 NVFS manager is closing file bn exe 357 mm dd yy 11 50 47 107 DEBUG 2 OOADER 15 Loader starting application tcp exe address 0x304797b0 gate id 0x0007b 358 mm dd yy 11 50 47 123 DEBUG 2 OADER 32 Loader serving request for tcp exe from 0x10006057 359 mm dd yy 11 50 47 139 INFO 2 TGR 9 TCR is UP 360 mm dd yy 11 50 47 180 DEBUG 2 OOADER 33 Loader service completed for tcp exe 0x10006057 361 mm dd yy 11 50 47 259 DEBUG 2 NVFS 63 NVFS manager is opening file bn exe for reading 362 mm dd yy 11 50 47 553 DEBUG 3 LOADER 30 Image tn exe loaded successfully from 2 bn exe 363 mm dd yy 11 50 47 569 DEBUG 3 LOADER 15 Loader starting application tn exe address 0x304a3cb0 gate id 0x00076 Loader serving request for tn exe from 0x200040df A 15 Troubleshooting Routers Connection TCP Open req Loader TCP Opened Connection NVFS manager Dynamic
182. n a nonpriority basis through the following automated systems CompuServe Bay Networks maintains an active forum on CompuServe All you need to join us online is a computer a modem and a CompuServe account We also recommend using the CompuServe Information Manager software available from CompuServe The Bay Networks forum contains libraries of technical and product documents designed to help you manage and troubleshoot your Bay Networks products Software agents and patches are available and the message boards are monitored by technical staff and can be a source for problem solving and shared experiences Customers and resellers holding Bay Networks service contracts can visit the special libraries to acquire advanced levels of support documentation and software To open an account and receive a local dial up number call CompuServe at 1 800 524 3388 and ask for Representative No 591 e Inthe United Kingdom call Freephone 0800 289378 xvi About This Guide e In Germany call 0130 37 32 e In Europe except for the United Kingdom and Germany call 44 272 760681 e Outside the U S Canada and Europe call 614 529 1349 and ask for Representative No 591 or consult your listings for an office near you Once you are online you can reach our forum by typing the command GO BAYNETWORKS at any prompt InfoFACTS InfoFACTS is the Bay Networks free 24 hour fax on demand service This automated system contains lib
183. n issue a command to terminate Packet Capture even if you configure it to terminate on its own Troubleshooting Routers If you want Packet Capture to terminate itself and e You configured Packet Capture to copy incoming packets enter set wfPktCaptureEntry 12 lt ine_no gt lt value gt commit 12 represents the wfPktCaptureRxTrigger attribute e You configured Packet Capture to copy outgoing packets enter set wfPktCaptureEntry 13 lt ine_no gt lt value gt commit 13 represents the wfPktCaptureTxTrigger attribute Enter both commands if you want to change the trigger settings for both incoming and outgoing packets lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command lt value gt is one of the following e 1 Packet Capture terminates when the Packet Capture file fills If the setting is not 1 and the file fills Packet Capture writes over the oldest packets in the file Caution Zf you configure Packet Capture to copy both received and transmitted packets it copies them to a single file Therefore if you choose both packet directions and set one of these parameters Receive Trigger or Transmit Trigger to 1 you must set the other to 1 If you fail to do this Packet Capture may write over the oldest packets regardless of whether an inte
184. nalyzer to check the segments involved in the problem 6 31 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting a Site Manager Problem This chapter describes how to solve Site Manager problems It includes the following sections e Site Manager Won t Start 73 Cannot Establish a Site Manager Session with the Router e Target Does Not Respond or Similar Message e Cannot Allocate Colormap Message e UNIX Workstation Generating Core Dumps Site Manager Won t Start The following sections describe how to troubleshoot a Site Manager installation e Site Manager Won t Start on a PC e Site Manager Won t Start on a UNIX Workstation Site Manager Won t Start on a PC Refer to the section that applies to your problem e Cannot Find File Message e Working Directory or Path Is Invalid Message 73 Unable to Find UDP Port Numbers for SNMP Message 7 1 Troubleshooting Routers Cannot Find File Message If a message like the one in Figure 7 1 states that the application cannot find the WFSM EXE or WINSOCK DLL Windows Socket Dynamic Link Library files when you click on the PC Site Manager icon install configure and test the TCP IP communication stack Cannot find file C apps WRWFSM EXE or one of its components O Check to ensure the path and filename are correct and that all required libraries are available Figure 7 1 Cannot Find File Erro
185. nd a transmit trigger Each trigger stops Packet Capture regardless of whether it is copying packets received transmitted or both The description of the Trigger parameters follows B 42 Parameters Default Options Function Instructions Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Trigger Packet Capture supports two trigger parameters The MIB information is as follows Packet Attribute Direction Attribute Name No MIB Object ID Incoming wfPktCaptureRxTrigger 12 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 12 Outgoing wfPktCaptureTxTrigger 13 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 13 4 Not used 1 Buffer full 2 Match Filter 1 3 Match Filter 2 4 Not used Sets Packet Capture to terminate automatically when the packet data matches a string that you specify or when the Packet Capture file fills The Receive Trigger parameter terminates Packet Capture if you set it to a filter and the incoming packet data matches a string that you specify The Transmit Trigger parameter terminates Packet Capture if you set it to a filter and the outgoing packet data matches a string that you specify If you want Packet Capture to terminate when the Packet Capture file fills set the Receive and Transmit Triggers to 1 If you select an option other than 1 and the file fills Packet Capture writes over the oldest packets in the file Caution If you configure Packet Capture to copy both incoming and outgoing packets
186. nection is FDDI or ATM Rx and Tx a Make sure you cabled correctly the A and B ports b Try looping Port A back to Port B to test for port failure If the Tx and Rx LEDs light the ports and cable are OK c Check the event log to make sure that the router brings the ring up and marks the circuit as active d If the loopback test fails try a different fiber cable Then try replacing the link module Note Multimode fiber is orange and single mode fiber is yellow The different fibers require different interface modules 4 5 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem This chapter describes how to solve data link layer problems It assumes you have already determined the scope of your problem as described in Chapter 2 This chapter includes the following sections Troubleshooting an ATM Connection Troubleshooting an Ethernet Connection Troubleshooting an FDDI Connection Troubleshooting a Frame Relay Connection Troubleshooting an MCT1 Connection Troubleshooting a Synchronous Connection Troubleshooting a Token Ring Connection Troubleshooting Other Data Link Protocols 5 1 Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting an ATM Connection This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to an ATM connection If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Troubleshoot ATM as follows
187. nes show that the MIB entity modifies the MIB objects for TCP and Telnet thereby causing these applications to initialize 343 mm dd yy 11 50 29 005 INFO 2 MIB 7 wfSnmp 3 0 set CO 228 1283 2 3 344 mm dd yy 11 50 29 096 INFO 2 MIB 5 wfTcp 2 0 set to 1 A 14 Reading the Event Log 345 mm dd yy 11 50 29 741 INFO 2 MIB 9 wfNode 2 0 set to 0x51e3200000000000 346 mm dd yy 11 50 45 598 INFO 2 MIB 5 wfTelnet 2 0 set to 1 347 mm dd yy 11 50 45 839 INFO 2 MIB 9 wfNode 2 0 set to 0x51e3200400000000 The object wfProtocols is the protocol bit map object Each attribute is a different protocol Every time you add or delete a protocol from a slot the MIB entity updates the bit map for that protocol Do not try to use the Technician Interface to update this field 348 mm dd yy 11 50 46 188 INFO 2 MIB 6 wfProtocols 18 0 set to 1610612736 349 mm dd yy 11 50 46 420 INFO 2 MIB 6 wfProtocols 15 0 set to 1610612736 NVFS reads the Telnet and TCP executable modules from memory card in Slot 2 the dynamic loader loads them in Slot 2 350 mm dd yy 11 50 46 762 DEBUG 2 NVFS 63 NVFS manager is opening file bn exe for reading 351 mm dd yy 11 50 46 932 DEBUG 3 OADER 27 Dynamic loader transaction with slot 2 server for tcp exe start address 0x304797B0 size 0x0000cec4 checksum 0x00394408 352 m
188. new community public assigned index 1 290 mm dd yy 11 48 51 432 DEBUG 3 SNI 38 Agent received new manager 0 for community index 1 291 mm dd yy 11 48 51 475 DEBUG 2 OADER 33 Loader service completed for ip exe 0x1000602a 298 mm dd yy 11 48 51 572 DEBUG 3 OADER 28 Dynamic loader completed transaction for ip exe 299 mm dd yy 11 48 51 600 DEBUG 3 OADER 15 Loader address 0x304f30b0 gate id 0x00048 The IP RTM updates its bit map to indicate it is running on Slot 3 300 mm dd yy 11 48 51 623 INFO 3 IP 4 Protocol initializing 301 mm dd yy 11 48 51 631 DEBUG 2 IP 8 RTM self map old a0000049 new b0000049 Slot 3 reads the driver needed for a SYNC port from bn exe 309 mm dd yy is opening file bn exe 11 48 52 080 DEBUG 2 for reading NVFS 63 NVFS manager A 13 Troubleshooting Routers 310 mm dd yy 11 48 52 564 DEBUG 3 LOADER 30 Image hdlc exe loaded successfully from 2 bn exe 311 mm dd yy 11 48 52 564 DEBUG 2 NVFS 64 NVFS manager is closing file bn exe 312 mm dd yy 11 48 52 584 DEBUG 3 LOADER 15 Loader starting application hdlc exe address 0x304d2130 gate id 0x00041 313 mm dd yy 11 48 52 588 INFO 3 SYNC 7 Service initializing AppleTalk entity AT successfully loads and initializes on Slot 3 The operating system elects to run the AppleTalk MIB soloist on slot 3 and AppleTalk updates the AT RTM
189. nfiguration file config then reboot the router 3 If you recently installed the router software image make sure it is correct for the router type and media memory card or diskette with which you are booting 3 3 Troubleshooting Routers For detailed instructions on router software image compatibility refer to the Upgrading Routers from Version 5 to Version 10 0 guide 4 If you set up the network to allow the router to netboot refer to Connecting BayStack AN and ANH Systems to a Network or Connecting ASN Routers and BNX Platforms to a Network 5 Ifthe router is an ASN refer to Tables 3 1 3 1 and the instructions that follow Otherwise refer to the LED section of the hardware manual associated with the router to diagnose the problem Table 3 1 ASN Front Panel LEDs Run LED Diagnostic LED Meaning on off Normal operation flashing flashing alternately SPX failure flashing on Diagnostic failure flashing off Router booting Table 3 2 ASN SPX Rear Panel LEDs LED Module Meaning When On FR SPX Stack Packet SPX transmitting Exchange FC SPX Flow control on to reduce data congestion in the backplane Troubleshoot an ASN as follows 3 4 Troubleshooting an Operational Problem a Ifthe ASN is in a stack make sure the SPX slot dial on the rear panel of each ASN points to a different slot ID Turn the selector in either direction so that the arro
190. nfigured endstation may be able to ping itself just as easily as a correctly configured endstation Try to make the router ping its own interface If the router can ping its own interface it enabled the interface and the protocols configured on the port However like an endstation a misconfigured router may be able to ping itself If the router cannot ping its own interface check the log and verify the physical status of the interface Try to make the endstation ping other interfaces on the same router Try to make the endstation ping other devices on the same segment Enter the Technician Interface loadmap lt s ot_no gt command for each slot and verify that IP and ARP are running on all slots Verify that the ARP cache only has entries for hosts on the local network Refer to the MIB object wflpNetToMediaEntry to locate the ARP cache 6 10 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Router Cannot Ping Endstation but Can Ping Other Endstations on the Same Segment If the router can ping other endstations successfully but not the endstation in question and the endstation in question cannot ping other nodes on the network do the following 1 Verify that the configuration of the endstation is correct 2 Verify that the router s ARP cache contains the endstation s MAC address Refer to the MIB object wflpNetToMediaEntry to locate the ARP cache If the MAC address is incorrect go to the endstation and try t
191. ng the Statistics Manager The ping command is available both from the Site Manager Administration menu and the Technician Interface When you enter the ping command the router not the Site Manager issues an ICMP echo request Options include packet size number of repetitions and the capability to trace the path of the ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol echo request When you lose AppleTalk APPN IP IPX OSI or VINES connectivity use the ping command to isolate the problem interface Try pinging the end node that has connectivity problems If you fail to get a response ping the local router interface and then ping each router interface along the way to the problem node If after attempting to ping a device the response is Unknown Network or Network Unreachable check the local node s routing table and its default gateway definition 1 20 Introduction If the ping command yields the response Target does not respond the station you issued the ping from believes it knows how to get to the end node but never received a reply to its echo request In this case start pinging each node in the path between the source and destination until you find the problem interface Refer to Using Technician Interface Software or Managing Routers and BNX Platforms for detailed instructions on issuing a ping command Using Packet Capture The Technician Interface Packet Capture tool allows you to filter send capture
192. ngs such as the internal LAN ID the group LAN ID and the bridge ID If you are using the Technician Interface enter the following command get wfBrSr 0 6 4 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to inspect the global DLSw settings such as the configured TCP window size and the total number of established DLSw sessions If you are using the Technician Interface enter the following command get wfDls 0 Make sure that the virtual ring ID for the IP cloud is unique and is consistent among all sites Use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to inspect the state of all of the DLSw interfaces currently configured and the value of the instance field If you are using the Technician Interface enter the following command get wfDisinterfaceEntry 3 Use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to inspect the state of all of the TCP connections If you are using the Technician Interface enter the following command get wiTcpConnEniry 2 Make sure all active TCP sessions are in an established state represented by the value 5 If the sessions are in an established state the local and remote DLSw TCP slot peer configuration is probably correct If the sessions are not in an established state do the following a Make sure all slots configured to run DLSw have a slot IP address assigned b Make sure that the slot IP
193. nly incoming packets with a Type field containing the hexadecimal number 0800 The instructions are as follows 1 Copy only incoming packets that match the Receive Filter 1 Match parameter setting set wfPktCaptureEntry 14 102101 1 14 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Type attribute Specify the Reference with which to begin the comparison set wfPktCaptureEntry 16 102101 1 16 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Ref attribute B 26 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Specify the number of bytes after the Reference with which to begin the comparison set wfPktCaptureEntry 15 102101 12 15 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Offset attribute Specify the number of bytes in the packet to compare with the string set wfPktCaptureEntry 17 102101 2 17 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Size attribute Specify the string as the hexadecimal number 0800 set wfPktCaptureEntry 18 102101 0x0800 commit 18 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Match attribute Example 5 This example specifies that Packet Capture copy only incoming packets with both a Type field of hexadecimal 0800 and a destination MAC address of ffffffffffff It assumes you already specified the Type field as shown in Example 4 The instructions are as follows 1 Copy incoming packets that match the Receive Filter 2 Match parameter setting set wfPktCaptureEntry 24 102101 1 24 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Type attribute
194. ntities Fault Warning Information Debug NMP Trace ECnet IV AME FIP DDI SMACD VFS Refresh Toggle Figure 1 1 Filtering Parameters Window The Filtering Parameters window allows you to filter by the severity of the event messages the software entity reporting them and the number of the slot from which the entity reported them 1 6 Introduction The Technician Interface log command supports optional arguments you can use to filter the display of event messages see Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Technician Interface Event Message Filters pee the Pol owing Technician Interface To Filter Events By Technician Interface Example Command Syntax The software entity such as IP that reported the log e lt entity gt log elP events Note Always use upper case letters when specifying a software entity The slot number of the processor that reported the log s lt s ot_no gt log s3 events The severity of the events The severities are fault log f lt f w t i d gt log ff warning trace informational and debug When using the Technician Interface to filter events use the first letter of the severity type Starting date and time Supported by the log d lt mm dd yy gt t lt hh mms gt log d01 22 96 t11 00 Technician Interface only Refer to Event Messages for Routers and BNX Platforms for a description of each severity type Note f you Site Manager or the Technic
195. o lines of code and memory addresses that are meaningless to you The Event Messages for Routers and BNX Platforms manual does not describe the Debug messages for this reason Note Do not become alarmed at Debug messages They appear routinely in the log Use the Fault Warning Info and Trace message severities as your primary filters for debugging problems before looking at the Debug messages By default Site Manager and the Technician Interface do not display Debug messages unless you use the Debug filter However displaying the Debug messages can help you to understand the systematic process the software uses to load and initialize discrete software components when starting And when the software detects a problem the debug messages can show you the systematic process the software uses to isolate its components shut them down and restart them to try to fix the problem Many debug messages are meaningless in isolation but when considered in the context of other messages they can help you to understand the problem Debug messages typically contain words such as creating dying killing gates and gate handles 1 8 Introduction The name of the router s operating system is GAME Gate Access Management Entity In addition to assuming the typical responsibilities of an operating system GAME creates gates Each gate is a process The process may be to perform a discrete action for a software ent
196. o ping the router The router should update its ARP cache with the correct MAC address The router s ARP cache entries do not age out unless you enable the HOST ARP cache 3 Look for an entry with alternating MAC addresses If an entry is alternating between one MAC address and another two devices on the network have duplicate IP addresses Change the IP address of one of the devices Endstation Cannot Ping the Remote Interface on the Router Refer to one of the following sections e Network Unreachable Message ee Host Did Not Respond Message Network Unreachable Message Verify that the endstation s configuration includes a default gateway If an endstation tries to send data to another IP address it uses its own subnet mask to determine whether the destination is on the same segment that is the same network and subnet or a remote segment that is a different network and or subnet If the destination address is on a remote segment and the endstation s configuration includes a default gateway it tries to route the packet via the gateway If the endstation s configuration does not include a default gateway it displays a network unreachable message Troubleshooting Routers Host Did Not Respond Message If the endstation or router displays this message do the following 1 Make sure that the endstation configuration includes a default gateway definition or listens to a routing protocol 2
197. occur ce Reading the Release Notes and Relevant Documentation e Minimizing Disruption When Installing New Software e Selecting the Proper Tool for Configuring a Router e Saving Your Configuration Changes e Backing Up Your Files 73 Maintaining Consistent Files in Multiple Memory Cards 73 Handling Memory Cards to Prevent Static Damage e Responding to a Failed prom Command Troubleshooting Routers Reading the Release Notes and Relevant Documentation The release notes and the manuals that describe how to configure and manage the protocols on your network provide guidelines on how to prevent problems Read them before installing or upgrading router or Site Manager software Minimizing Disruption When Installing New Software When installing or upgrading software or using a new feature for the first time test it at a time or on a node that minimizes disruption to the network After verifying the change make the change and verify it on one node at a time in the network Doing so will help you to isolate and solve any problems that may occur as a result of the change Selecting the Proper Tool for Configuring a Router We recommend that you use the configuration tools as follows e Use the Configuration Manager in remote or local mode when you create a new configuration file or make major changes to an existing configuration file e Use the Configu
198. of Debug messages Displaying and Changing Configuration Settings and Statistics The router s management information base MIB determines its configuration and state of operation The following sections describe how to access the MIB variables e Using the Technician Interface to Access the MIB e Using the Technician Interface Scripts to Access the MIB e Using the Statistics Manager to Access the MIB Troubleshooting Routers Using the Technician Interface to Access the MIB The Technician Interface is an out of band router management and troubleshooting tool When the Site Manager connection to the router is unavailable you can use the Technician Interface as a remote management tool to manage the router and troubleshoot the problem The Using the Technician Interface guide explains how to connect a modem to the router to establish a remote Technician Interface session The internal structure of the MIB contains e Objects An object is a collection of MIB objects that store data to serve a specialized purpose e Attributes An attribute is a variable parameter e Instances An instance is a physical manifestation of an attribute e Values A value is the data stored in a location indexed by an object an attribute associated with that object and an instance of that attribute Suppose you are shopping for a house and a car and you want to create databases of information about houses and cars
199. ommand to start FTP FTP B 30 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture 2 Issue the following command to establish an FTP connection with the router open lt P_address gt lt IP_address gt is the IP address of the router Example connect 1 1 1 1 3 Enter the following command to specify that the file to be transferred is binary mode binary 4 Enter the following command to retrieve a copy of the file get lt filename gt lt filename gt is the name displayed after you issued the get command in 6 Getting the Name of the Packet Capture File Example get PCAP0400 5 Enter the following command to terminate FTP quit Using TFTP to Transfer the File When you use TFTP to get a Packet Capture file the TFTP software transfers it from the processor s memory instead of the media The procedure for using TFTP to transfer a copy of a file to a Sun workstation or PC depends on the implementation of TFTP on that system The following instructions apply to Sun workstations If you are using a PC and need instructions for using TFTP refer to the documentation for the TCP IP stack installed on the PC Enter the following commands at the command line interface of the Sun workstation 1 Issue the following command to start TFTP tftp B 31 Troubleshooting Routers 2 Issue the following command to establish a TFTP connection with the router connect lt P_address gt
200. on a computer You create objects tables named House and Car to store this information You assign each object a unique number called an object identifier For example the object identifier for House is 1 and Car is 2 Now you can access information by naming the object or by using its object identifier You create attributes to describe houses attributes such as list price size of lot type of house color town street house number garage or no garage number of bedrooms number of bathrooms and how much you like it on a scale of 1 to 10 You assign each attribute a unique number called an attribute identifier For example you use 1 for list price 2 for size of lot 3 for type of house etc To access the size of lot you can specify the object by name House or by identifier 1 and the attribute by name SizeOfLot or number 2 in the format House SizeOfLot or 1 2 Now you can list the attributes of House by entering list House Example list House ListPrice SizeOfLot TypeOfHouse Color 4 I Me Introduction Town 5 Street 6 HouseNo 7 Bedrooms 8 Bathrooms 9 TotalSquareFeet 10 HowMuchILikeIt 11 You set up attributes to describe cars attributes such as list price year of manufacture make model automatic or manual transmission color number of people it will fit dealer s name reputation on a scale of 1 to 10 and how much you like it on a
201. on parameters 6 Use Packet Capture and a network analyzer to check the segments involved in the problem The following sections describe how to respond to certain event messages from AppleTalk 6 Local Net Range Conflict Event Message 6 Zone Conflict Event Message e Static Configuration Conflict Event Message Local Net Range Conflict Event Message Configure the router s interface to match the network range configured on the seed router The configured network range failed to match that of another seed router s defined network range The router sent a request for network information and received a response that contained a network range that was inconsistent with that configured for the interface Zone Conflict Event Message If the message Zone Name Conflict Number of Zones on Extended Net Conflict Or Default Zone Seed Conflict appears in the event log configure the router s interface to match the zones configured on the seed router The configured network range failed to match the defined zones of another seed router The router sent a ZIP Zone Information Protocol request and received a response that contained zone information that was inconsistent with that configured for the interface The message Number of Zones on Extended Net Conflict appears if a zone other than the default zone fails to match that of the seed router or if the default zone name is in the zone list The
202. or XMODEM connection to the router to transfer a copy of the file you can use the Packet Dump utility to display the packets in hexadecimal format The Packet Dump utility shows the same information about each packet as the Technician Interface but it does not provide options for specifying the packet by number or quantity B 3 Troubleshooting Routers Implementation Notes Packet Capture copies packets received or transmitted as error free It does not copy packets containing errors Packet Capture saves the MAC addresses in native media format Packet Capture does not display Frame Check Sequence FCS fields Getting Started This section describes how to start and stop Packet Capture and look at a Packet Capture file The default parameter values allow Packet Capture to copy all incoming packets from the circuits you specify until you enter a command to terminate it After learning the basic features of Packet Capture you can then go to Using Advanced Features to customize Packet Capture The basic instructions for using Packet Capture include the following sections e Preparing Packet Capture to Run e Starting Packet Capture e Terminating Packet Capture e Using the Technician Interface to Display a Packet Capture File e Deleting a Packet Capture Instance Preparing Packet Capture to Run The following sections provide the minimum number of instructions required to
203. or use by any third party Neither title nor ownership to Software passes to licensee Licensee shall not provide or otherwise make available any Software in whole or in part in any form to any third party Third parties do not include consultants subcontractors or agents of licensee who have licensee s permission to use the Software at licensee s facility and who have agreed in writing to use the Software only in accordance with the restrictions of this license Third party owners from whom Bay Networks has acquired license rights to software that is incorporated into Bay Networks products shall have the right to enforce the provisions of this license against licensee Licensee shall not remove or obscure any copyright patent trademark trade secret or similar intellectual property or restricted rights notice within or affixed to any Software and shall reproduce and affix such notice on any backup copy of Software or copies of software resulting from modification or combination performed by licensee as permitted by this license Bay Networks Inc 4401 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 8 Federal Street Billerica MA 01821 Bay Networks Software License continued 10 11 12 Licensee shall not reverse assemble reverse compile or in any way reverse engineer the Software Note For licensees in the European Community the Software Directive dated 14 May 1991 as may be amended from time to time shall
204. orks representative must reinsert new PROMs programmable read only memory chips on the board and rewrite the PROM software to them before the router can recover Preparing to Troubleshoot e Getting Acquainted with the Troubleshooting Tools e Taking a Snapshot of Your Network Getting Acquainted with the Troubleshooting Tools Troubleshooting is much more complicated when you have to solve a problem that requires an urgent solution and at the same time learn the how to use the tools you need to solve the problem Read this section and familiarize yourself with the tools before you begin troubleshooting The instructions later in this manual assume you can use the tools identified in this section This chapter includes the following sections Using the System Log to Display Event Messages e Displaying and Changing Configuration Settings and Statistics e Using Ping e Using Packet Capture Using Inbound Telnet to Access the Technician Interface Using the System Log to Display Event Messages The processor running software in each slot maintains its own log file in local memory Software entities such as CSMACD and IP report messages when routine and noteworthy events occur When you command Site Manager or the Technician Interface to display the messages the router automatically assembles the messages from all slots into a single file and displays the fil
205. ort Numbers for SNMP Message AEE A e Site Manager Won t Start on a UNIX Workstation c cccccssseeeeeeenseeeeeeesteeeeeeeeaes 7 3 Unable to Load SNMP MIB or File Was Inaccessible Message 0 00 7 4 Unable to Rur Module MESSAGE cnccncccciatsanciisecruestesetciceriesneineniainss 7 4 Cannot Establish a Site Manager Session with the Router ccccscceesseesteeeeesseeeees 7 5 Using an Alternative Site Manager Workstation to Enable Access s cer D Using the Technician Interface to Enable ACCESS cccccessceeseecceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeaaees 7 6 Cannot Connect after Upgrading a Series 5 Router cccssceeeeesseeeeeeestteeeeeeeaes 7 6 Cannot Connect Site Manager Running On a PC ou eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeneeeteaeeeeeneeeeees 7 6 Cannot Connect Site Manager Running on a UNIX Workstation eeeeeeeee 7 7 Target Does Not Respond or Similar Message ccccccsseceeeeesseeeeceeeneeeeeeestaeeeeeeeaas 7 8 Cannot Allocate Colormap Mesage sirarsa Aay 7 9 UNIX Workstation Generating Core DUMPS sscasciniiaisraniinna 7 9 Chapter 8 Getting Help Reporting a Problem to the Bay Networks Technical Response Center c 8 1 Sending and Retrieving Files to and from Bay Networks cceccceeecsesceeeeeseeteeeeeeeeeeaees 8 2 viii Appendix A Reading the Event Log Py eH si WIE anaiai aS A 2 Diao Demand Rase DTR LOQ mirsani aa Brey Tne teers Re OE UT TTT A 18 B
206. pBaseDefaultTIL 0 30 wfIpBase wfIpBaseRipDiameter 0 15 wfIpBase wfIpBaseRouteCache 0 60 wfIpBase wfIpBaseMibTables 0 2 wfIpBase wfIpBaseNetworks 0 250 6 6 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem wfIpBase wfIpBaseZeroSubnetEnable 0 2 wfIpBase wfIpBaseEstimatedNetworks 0 0 wfIpBase wfIpBaseHosts 0 81 wfIpBase wfIpBaseEstimatedHosts 0 0 wfIpBase wfIpBaseDefaultOverSubnetEnable 0 2 wfIpBase wfIpBaseMaxPolicyRules 0 32 J E 3 Check the values of the following statistics twice in the wfIpInterfaceEntry object Compare them to determine whether IP is currently receiving and transmitting packets and generating errors e The reception and transmission statistics If the reception or transmission statistics do not change do the following Check the reception and transmission statistics of the other protocols associated with the same connector and the same slot Try disabling and enabling IP and watch the log messages to determine why the connection will not come up Caution Do not do this if it could be disruptive to the network e The error statistics 4 Make sure that the next hop and network you are trying to reach are in the routing table entries 5 Verify the configuration parameters 6 Use Packet Capture and a network analyzer to check the segments involved in the problem Refer to one of the following sections if it pertains to your problem e Troubleshootin
207. ping lt ip_address gt you enter ping 192 32 10 12 Separates menu and option names in instructions Example Protocols gt AppleTalk identifies the AppleTalk option in the Protocols menu Indicates text that you need to enter and command names in text Example Use the dinfo command Indicate optional elements You can choose none one or all of the options Indicate omitted information Indicates variable values in command syntax descriptions new terms file and directory names and book titles Indicate the title of a chapter or section within a book Indicates data that appears on the screen Example set Bay Networks Trap Monitor Filters Indicates that you enter only one of the parts of the command The vertical line separates choices Do not type the vertical line when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show at routes nets you enter either show at routes or show at nets but not both xviii About This Guide Ordering Bay Networks Publications To purchase additional copies of this document or other Bay Networks publications order by part number from Bay Networks Press at the following numbers You may also request a free catalog of Bay Networks Press product publications Phone FAX U S Canada FAX International Acronyms AAL ACE AFN ALC ALN AMI AN ARP ASCII ASN AT ATM B8ZS BCN BECN BERT BLN BN BOFL BRI CD CHAP 1 800 845 9523 1 800 582 8000 1
208. ppears in the Technician Interface 3 Display the routing tables 4 Enter the following command to copy the file from memory to the router s file storage medium and terminate the recording record close 1 22 Introduction To learn more about the Technician Interface recording feature enter help record You can use the Statistics Manager to save tables to files as follows 1 Use the Statistics Manager Screen Manager tool to add the routing tables in the Default Screen List window to the Current Screen List window 2 For each routing table a Use the Launch Facility tool to display it b Use the File gt Save option to save the contents of it to a formatted ASCII file You can use any editor to read the ASCII files or print and organize them for later reference A map of your network configuration is another useful resource to have available for troubleshooting Include information about the hardware the software and the cables you are using When troubleshooting a problem compare the next hop on the network map to that of the forwarding table associated with the problem protocol Documenting Each Step An effective troubleshooting strategy includes taking detailed notes as you perform each procedure These notes are useful because e They give you an opportunity to pause and think clearly about the problem and the procedures you are following You are more likely to develop a methodical and reasoned appro
209. prepare Packet Capture to run e Assigning the Processors to Run Packet Capture e Creating an Instance of Packet Capture e Allocating Memory for the Packet Capture File e Specifying the Number of Bytes in Each Packet to Copy e Enabling Packet Capture B 4 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Assigning the Processors to Run Packet Capture To assign processors to run Packet Capture you determine which slots in the router contain the circuits from which you want to copy packets Then enter the following Technician Interface command to assign the processors set wfProtocols 26 0 lt s iot_mask gt commit 26 represents the wfPktCaptureLoad attribute parameter lt slot_mask gt is a hexadecimal number representing one or more slots containing circuits or channels from which you want to copy packets If you want Packet Capture to copy packets from circuits in a single I O module use the associated slot mask listed in Table B 1 Table B 1 Determining the Slot Mask Slot No Slot Mask 1 0x80000000 2 0x40000000 3 0x20000000 4 0x10000000 5 0x08000000 6 0x04000000 8 0x01000000 9 0x00800000 10 0x00400000 11 0x00200000 12 0x00100000 13 0x00080000 14 0x00040000 Example To load Packet Capture on Slot 2 enter set wfProtocols 26 0 0x40000000 commit B 5 Troubleshooting Routers If you
210. ptureEntry lt attribute _no gt lt line_no gt lt value gt commit lt attribute _no gt is e 18 for Receive Filter 1 18 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Match attribute e 28 for Receive Filter 2 28 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Match attribute e 23 for Transmit Filter 1 23 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFltr1 Match attribute e 34 for Transmit Filter 2 34 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Match attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command lt value gt is any hexadecimal number or character string up to 16 characters Specifying the Data to Compare with the String Refer to the following sections to specify the data within the packet to compare with the string e Specifying the Reference e Specifying the Offset e Specifying the Number of Bytes B 21 Troubleshooting Routers Specifying the Reference Enter the following Technician Interface command to specify the reference which is the field in the packet set wfPktCaptureEntry lt attribute _no gt lt line_no gt lt value gt commit lt attribute_no gt is e 16 for Receive Filter 1 16 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Ref attribute e 26 for Receive Filter 2 26 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Ref attribute
211. r pktconv pcap0300 B 34 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Packet Convert creates a Sniffer file named PCAP0300 TRC e Fora SYNC Packet Capture file named PCAP0200 you enter pktconv pcap0200 Packet Convert creates a Sniffer file named PCAP0200 SYC e Fora FDDI Packet Capture file named PCAPO500 you enter pktconv pcap0500 Packet Convert creates a Sniffer file named PCAP0500 FDC Note f you use the Point to Point Standard protocol the file will convert but you must use the Sniffer Protocol Forcing option in order to decode the packets Reference Guide to Packet Capture This reference guide includes the following sections e Displaying the Packet Capture Attribute Names and Numbers e Packet Capture Parameter Descriptions e Media Specific Instructions and Examples e Interpreting a Packet Capture Instance Number Displaying the Packet Capture Attribute Names and Numbers Enter the following command to display the attributes of the Packet Capture wfPktCaptureEntry object and their associated numeric identifiers list wfPktCaptureEniry Note Do not confuse the numeric identifier next to an attribute name with the value of that attribute The numeric identifier is an alternative way to identify an attribute when issuing a get command To get the values of the Packet Capture attributes go to Displaying the Current Packet Capture Configuration Sett
212. r CSMACD 2 for synchronous 3 for T1 4 for E1 5 for TOKEN 6 for FDDI 7 for HSSI 9 for MCT1 13 for ISDN D Channel 15 for bisynchronous slot 2 Number of the slot continued B 55 Troubleshooting Routers Table B 2 Structure of a Line Number continued 3 No of Digits P Fleig Reserved in the Field Description mod 1 Module number On the ASN the module number is in the range 1 4 All other platforms require that you set it to 1 conn 2 Connector number for the specific medium Example The code for a single CSMA CD interface on Slot 2 using XCVRI1 is 0000102101 Site Manager removes the leading zeros assigning a line number of 102101 B 56 Symbols in get command 1 17 A ACE32 memory limitations 3 13 adding VC gate w GH event message 5 5 address format synchronous 5 21 adjacency control blocks 6 22 adjacency ID 6 22 AFN memory limitations 3 13 aggregate cell rate 5 2 alignment error 5 8 alternating MAC addresses 6 11 AMI alternate mark inversion A 36 AN memory limitations 3 13 AppleTalk 6 2 to 6 4 arp a command 7 8 ARP cache 6 10 7 8 ASCII files saving tables 1 22 saving the log 1 5 ASN cables 3 5 LEDs 3 4 slot ID 3 5 asterisk in get command 1 17 asynchronous file transfers to Bay Networks 8 2 ATM 5 2 to 5 5 ATM_ERR codes 5 5 Packet Capture B 50 Index VC mod failed message 5 4 attributes 1 10 to 1 18
213. r Message Note You must install a TCP IP stack such as Chameleon or Distinct TCP IP and configure it properly before you install Site Manager Test the TCP IP stack as follows 1 Use the TCP IP communication stack on the PC to ping the interface on the PC s network interface card If you cannot ping the interface configure the TCP IP stack 2 Use the TCP IP communication stack on the PC to ping another node on the local network If you do not receive a response to the ping request do the following a Check the cable connection to the PC b Check the cable connection to the local node you are trying to ping c Make sure that you configured the TCP IP stack If you cannot ping a device that can ping other devices and the cabling is OK the configuration of the TCP IP stack is incorrect 7 2 Troubleshooting a Site Manager Problem Make sure that the environment variable PATH contains only the path to the protocol stack that you want Site Manager to use Otherwise the PC will boot but Site Manager may use the wrong protocol stack it uses the first winsocket library it finds when searching the directories in the environment variable PATH Working Directory or Path Is Invalid Message These messages appear when the properties of the PC personal computer Site Manager icon fail to match the installation and configuration Do the following 1 2 Click the PC Site Manager icon Select File gt Proper
214. r Response to a Match ssssssssssssssesrnessrsrssnsssenssressrenssnssens B 20 Specifying the String to Compare with the Packet Data cecssseeeeentees B 21 Specifying the Data to Compare with the String cccccsseeeeeeessteeeeeeenaees B 21 Selecting the Number of Filters that Must Match cccccsseccesessteeeeeeeneees B 24 SONMOMGAVON EXAM IGOR serisinin i aa B 25 Displaying the Current Packet Capture Configuration Settings cceeeseeeseeeeeees B 28 Displaying Event Messages Issued by Packet Capture 0 c ccceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeesteeeeeees B 29 Using a Sun Workstation or DOS PC to Display Packets cccccseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 29 Getting the Name of the Packet Capture File ccccessceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeesaeeneaes B 30 Using FTP to Transfer the File mentees seinem a EE TT PE B 30 Using TPIP to tansier ihe Fle ncnian aas B 31 Using XMODEM to Transfer the File c ccc ccccssecesseeceesseeesseeesesseeeseeeeessaeeseaeees B 32 DiSPlay tig the FIG scisccscicsrnccdsierersincareapiiacinedas antieairiesaneantancinediieideinetionaramaels B 33 Converting a Packet Capture File to Network General Sniffer Format 0 B 33 Reference Guide to Packet Capture ET EE E ET endis B 35 Displaying the Packet Capture Attribute Names and Numbers s B 35 Packet Capture Parameter Descriptions cccceeceeeeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneens
215. r software image and configuration file into the FRE processor module 5 Boot the router 3 10 Troubleshooting an Operational Problem 6 Engage the thumb clips of the other FRE processor modules 7 Wait for the modules to reset 8 Enter the Technician Interface password Manager User command to create or change the password The new FRE processor distributes the new password to the other processors which then overwrite the old password No Space Left on Memory Card When you delete a file on a memory card the file system makes the file inaccessible but the file continues to use space on the card Each time you store a file the file system stores the file at the first unused space Eventually after you store and delete multiple files the card runs out of usable space because the deleted files continue to take up space To free up space taken by deleted files use the Compact option in the File Manager Commands menu or enter the Technician Interface compact lt volume gt command For example enter compact 2 to compact the files in Volume 2 The file system copies all of the files to memory except for the deleted ones erases the memory card and copies the files back to the memory card When you copy any file on a memory card in a router running Version 7 80 or higher the file system compares the size of the file with the amount of unused space on the memory card If the file can fit in the unused space the file s
216. rarchy of objects you could specify a color of a particular house by connecting the identifier of each object from the top of the hierarchy to the instance For example to display the color code of the house at 10 Pleasant St in Easton you could enter any one of the following commands get Things ltemsToPurchase House Color 10 Pleasant Easton e get House Color 10 Pleasant Easton All objects must have unique names The unique name House provides you with a way to access House without having to specify the objects Things ItemsToPurchase get 1 1 1 4 10 Pleasant Easton In this example you specify the object identifiers in place of Things ItemsToPurchase House Color get House 4 10 Pleasant Easton In this example you specify the object identifier 4 in place of Color The router software uses a large hierarchy of objects that together form the MIB Management Information Base The software uses the data in these objects to configure itself and to determine its behavior in the network just as you would have used the data to determine your behavior that is select a house and a car You can view all the object names in the router s MIB by entering the Technician Interface list command The following example shows a small part of the list of objects you can display with this command The numbers to the right of the equal sign are not values they are the numeric identifiers of these objects that you can use in place of
217. raries of technical and product documents designed to help you manage and troubleshoot your Bay Networks products The system can return a fax copy to the caller or to a third party within minutes of being accessed World Wide Web The World Wide Web WWW is a global information system for file distribution and online document viewing via the Internet You need a direct connection to the Internet and a Web Browser such as Mosaic or Netscape Bay Networks maintains a WWW Home Page that you can access at http www baynetworks com One of the menu items on the Home Page is the Customer Support Web Server which offers technical documents software agents and an E mail capability for communicating with our technical support engineers How to Get Help For additional information or advice contact the Bay Networks Technical Response Center in your area United States 1 800 2LAN WAN Valbonne France 33 92 966 968 Sydney Australia 61 2 903 5800 Tokyo Japan 81 3 328 005 xvii Troubleshooting Routers Conventions This section describes the conventions used in this guide angle brackets lt gt arrow character gt bold text brackets ellipsis points italic text quotation marks screen text vertical line l Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example if command syntax is
218. ration Manager in dynamic mode only to perform minor changes such as change a filter or add a port e Use the Technician Interface to issue set and commit commands to make minor configuration changes only if the Site Manager is unavailable the Technician Interface does not provide error checking Caution Dynamic changes to the router s base records and global parameters can cause an interruption in service For example if you change the size of the bridge forwarding table the router deletes the table and re creates it causing a temporary decline in performance Therefore you may want to schedule such changes to minimize their impact on your network Saving Your Configuration Changes The router overwrites the configuration changes in memory when it reboots If you use either the Configuration Manager in dynamic mode or the Technician Interface set and commit commands to change the file in memory you must perform the following procedures if you want to save your changes 1 2 Introduction If you use the Configuration Manager in dynamic mode to make changes select File gt Save or File gt Save As to copy the configuration from memory to the media otherwise the changes will be lost after the router reboots If you enter the Technician Interface set and commit commands you must enter the following command to copy the modified configuration from memory to the media save config lt volume gt lt filename gt Backing Up Your
219. rd character to get the states of all connectors of a particular type on a slot or all connectors of a particular type on the entire router For example enter get wfiCSMACDEntry 3 to display the state of all Ethernet connectors on the router Example get wfCSMACDEntry 3 wfCSMACDEntry wfCSMACDState wf CSMACDEntry wfCSMACDState w CSMACDEntry wfCSMACDState wf CSMACDEntry wfCSMACDState errr BWR Il PRPPR Refer to Table 4 1 for the meaning of the value of the attribute Table 4 1 Values of Media State Attributes Meaning of State Attribute Value CSMAC ovnc T E1 Token Epp HSSI D Ring 1 up up up up up up up down down down down LMI wait initializing initializing initializing initializing initializing initializing BOFL wait continued 4 2 Troubleshooting a Physical Media Problem Table 4 1 Values of Media State Attributes continued Meaning of State Attribute Value CSMAC syne IT E1 Token EppI HSSI D Ring 4 not wait not not not not CA wait present present present present present 5 not initializing present 6 DSR wait not present 7 hold down 8 remote loop Respond to State attribute values as follows 1 If the media specific state of the interface in question is up check the statistics associated with that layer If those statistics show that the media is OK go to Chapter 6 If
220. ress Resolution Protocol to run on the router s interface because the endstation does not know that it has to go through the router to get to other subnets of the 129 122 0 0 network 2 Disable IP on the router s interface and try to ping the IP address of the router again If the ping succeeds a device with a duplicate IP address is on the segment 3 Enable IP on the router s interface and try to ping other stations on the segment that is reporting problems 6 13 Troubleshooting Routers If the attempts to ping fail verify that you configured the router with the correct IP network interface and subnet addresses Endstation Can Ping Local and Remote Interfaces on the Router but Cannot Ping a Remote Station Do the following 1 Ping the device on each link in the path between the source and destination to determine the location of the problem Note Use the Site Manager or Technician Interface path option when pinging the remote station This option provides the same functionality as traceroute does on a UNIX workstation 2 Make sure that the next hop for each network points to the correct interface 3 Ping from the remote station to the local station This verifies that each router in the path not only has a route to the remote segment but also has a path back to the originator of the ping request Troubleshooting Routing Information Protocol RIP If the router cannot reach a network or ho
221. rface received or transmitted them e 2 Packet Capture terminates when data matches the value of the Filter 1 Match parameter for the packet direction queried e 3 Packet Capture terminates when data matches the value of the Filter 2 Match parameter for the packet direction queried e 4 Packet Capture runs until you terminate it manually This is the default setting B 18 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Example Enter the following command if you configured the Packet Capture instance associated with Logical Line No 102101 to copy only incoming packets and you want it to terminate itself when it matches packet data to the Filter 2 Match parameter set wfPktCaptureEntry 12 102101 3 commit Assigning Filters Use this section if you want to specify a string of alphanumeric characters to compare with the packet data When Packet Capture matches packet data to the string it either copies the packet to the Packet Capture file or it terminates without copying the packet Packet Capture supports two filters for incoming packets and two filters for outgoing packets The filter names are e Receive Filter 1 matches incoming packet data to a string you specify e Receive Filter 2 matches incoming packet data to a second string you specify e Transmit Filter 1 matches outgoing packet data to a string you specify e Transmit Filter 2 matches outgoing packet data to a second string you specify
222. ription of each attribute and its possible values Example get wfPktCaptureEntry 102101 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureDelete 102101 1 wf PktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureDisable 102101 1 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureState 102101 1 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureFname 102101 PCAP0200 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureControl 102101 1 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureCapture 102101 2 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureLineNumber 102101 102101 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureBufSize 102101 0 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCapturePktSize 102101 0 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureDirection 102101 1 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureCount 102101 0 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureRxTrigger 102101 4 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureTxTrigger 102101 4 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureRxFltriType 102101 3 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureRxFltrlo0ffset 102101 0 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureRxFltrlRef 102101 1 wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureRxFltrlSize 102101 0 wf PktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureRxFltrlMatch 102101 nil wfPktCaptureEntry wfPktCaptureTxFltrlType 102101 3 B 28 wf wf wf wf wf wf wf wf wf wf wf wf wf wf wf wf PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap PktCap Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture turel turel turel turel tureE tureE tureE tureE
223. rity of events 1 7 SF super frame A 35 show script commands 1 19 single mode fiber yellow 4 5 Site Manager 7 1 to 7 9 slot configuring for Packet Capture B 5 dial 3 5 mask B 5 SMDS Packet Capture B 52 SNMP 7 5 to 7 6 SNMP MIB could not be loaded from the file message 7 4 soloist A 5 space shortage on memory card 3 11 on transmission queue Tx 5 9 SPEX Stack Packet Exchange 3 5 SPX Stack Packet Exchange 3 5 SQE Signal Quality Error test 5 10 standard IPX mode both RIP supply and RIP listen 6 18 startup event messages A 2 to A 17 state attribute 6 30 static configuration conflict event message 6 4 Statistics Manager tools 1 19 statistics not changing 5 26 6 31 subnet mask 6 13 UNIX 7 8 switched services 6 23 to 6 29 synchronous connections 5 19 to 5 23 Packet Capture B 8 system startup event messages A 2 to A 17 T T1 Packet Capture B 8 target does not respond message 1 21 TCP connection state 6 5 TCP creating 1 21 TCP IP communication stack 7 2 Technician Interface 1 10 See also commands and Telnet Telnet 1 21 6 8 to 6 9 termination trigger B 17 B 42 terminator plugs inserting in SPEX module 3 5 TFTP 6 8 to 6 9 memory card error 3 11 Packet Capture files B 31 TFTP file transfers to Bay Networks 8 2 time filtering events 1 7 Token Ring 5 24 Packet Capture B 8 B 53 tools See also Packet Capture Launch Facility 1 20 Quick Get 1 19 Scr
224. rtions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written permission SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties Bay Networks Software License Note This is Bay Networks basic license document In the absence of a software license agreement specifying varying terms this license or the license included with the particular product shall govern licensee s use of Bay Networks software This Software License shall govern the licensing of all software provided to licensee by Bay Networks Software Bay Networks will provide licensee with Software in machine readable form and related documentation Documentation The Software provided under this license is proprietary to Bay Networks and to third parties from whom Bay Networks has acquired license rights Bay Networks will not grant any Software license whatsoever either explicitly or implic
225. ry Refer to Table 3 3 to determine how much memory is available for the type of processor in your router 3 12 Troubleshooting an Operational Problem Table 3 3 Memory Configuration System Software Limitations Memory Type Increment By oe Which You Can ype Minimum Local Maximum Local Minimum Global Maximum Global Allocate Memory FRE II 4 Mb 30 Mb 2 Mb 16 Mb 2 Mb ACE32 2624 Kb 3 Mb 1 Mb 1472 Kb 1 Kb 4 Mb 2 56 Mb 1 43 Mb ACE32 2624 Kb 7 Mb 1 Mb 4 Mb 1 Kb 8 Mb 2 56 Mb ACE32 2624 Kb 12 Mb 1 Mb 4 Mb 1 Kb 16 Mb 2 56 Mb AFN 2624 Kb 3 Mb 1 Mb 1472 Kb 64 Kb 4 Mb 2 56 Mb 1 43 Mb AFN 2624 Kb 12 Mb 1 Mb 4 Mb 64 Kb 16 Mb 2 56 Mb AN 1868 Kb 16204 Kb 180 Kb 14516 Kb 1 Kb 1 82 Mb 15 82 Mb 14 17 Mb To make sure the applications are loaded on the slot enter the Technician Interface loadmap lt s ot_no gt command Example loadmap 5 Loadmap from SLOT 5 arp exe ftp exe tcp exe tftp exe snmp exe tn exe ip exe ds2181 exe hdlc exe el exe O OTT O OO O O x30af65c0 0008944 x30a4a8a0 0042676 x30a54f70 0057632 x30a630a0 0020680 x30a68180 0030360 x30a73850 0038424 x30a80ea0 0179700 x30al0b80 0005640 x30a1l3d60 0058272 x30a7d4 0 0004032 Note Do not insert a colon after the slot no in the loadmap command The colon applies only to media volumes not to processor boards 3 13 Troubleshooting Routers The response s
226. ry on the Bay Networks FTP file server Refer to Chapter 8 for file transfer instructions Access the directory and enter the following command at the Sun or DOS PC or UNIX command line pkidump lt filename gt lt filename gt is the name of the Packet Capture file you retrieved from the router Packet Dump shows the same information about each packet as the Technician Interface but it does not provide options for specifying the packet by number or quantity Go to Using the Technician Interface to Display a Packet Capture File for a description of the fields and to Example 1 within that section to look at a sample display Converting a Packet Capture File to Network General Sniffer Format You can use the Packet Convert utility to a Packet Capture file that you retrieved from the router to Network General Sniffer format This format allows the Sniffer to use the high level of decoding available to it to decode the captured packets The Site Manager installation software installs the Packet Convert utility on the following platforms e On DOS PCs in the wf directory The filename is pktconv dos e On SPARCstations in the usr wf bin directory The filename is pktconv spc The SPARCstation version runs only under SunOS B 33 Troubleshooting Routers These utilities are also available in the perm pkt_convert directory on the Bay Networks FTP file server Refer to Chapter 8 for file transfer instructions The N
227. sac ao tadaae atataadora nade hrgiteaasanmaniieds 6 11 Endstation Cannot Ping the Remote Interface on the Router ccee 6 11 Endstation Can Ping Devices on the Same Segment but Cannot Ping the Router 6 12 vii Endstation Can Ping Local and Remote Interfaces on the Router but Cannot Ping a Remote Station 0 0 an E E AIRON ra 6 14 Troubleshooting Routing Information Protocol RIP ssssaissesirisnnennsnn 6 14 Troubleshooting Open Shortest Path First OSPF c ccesceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 6 15 WPOURMES GBC A arrana A a ene 6 16 MUDES ROON EO ea gee er rrereer etre reee rte ree reese rerrer ere rerrrrer Tree rree reer rretre rerere nt reer 6 21 Troubleshooting Switched Servies ss cgia ines cna nseiendasaseeceus eraa iai 6 23 Master Camel Connect to SUG aieas a Ea 6 25 Troubleshooting RS232 Raise DTR Dial Unbalanced ceeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeeees 6 25 Troubleshooting V 35 Raise DTR Dial Balanced siresissiiernieiierossiniinenisen 6 26 Troubleshooing ISDN BRI AnA PRI serisinin eiei E E 6 27 Troubleshooting Other Networking Protocols ssssssssssessssrnsesrnessrnsssnsssnnsnnnssresssens 6 30 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting a Site Manager Problem Sie Manager Wom i oTa gean ENE ATEENA 7 1 Sis Manager Wonton ona PO ssorieenosa iein e E 7 1 Cannot FNA Pile MESSAGE eroin ea a n 7 2 Working Directory or Path Is Invalid Message eeeeeeccceeesteeeeeeeetteeeeeessteeeeeees 7 3 Unable to Find UDP P
228. shooting Routers This shows the number of times the router dropped frames it received because of a lack of buffers or a lack of space on the transmission queue The possibility that some errors occur is likely especially when the router boots If this number increases to a high rate such as 15 minute for an extended period it may indicate a problem Check the wfKernelEntry for the slot where the problem is occurring to determine whether free buffers are available To do this enter get wfKernelEntry lt s ot gt For example get wfKernelEntry 2 The router reports the number of available buffers in slot 2 If free buffers are available something on the network is preventing the router from updating its buffer lists Check for protocol storms for example from IP RIP IPX RIP and IPX SAP and learning bridge reconverging If no buffers are available check the configuration of the line and the line utilization Increase the configured receive queue length wfSyncCfgRxQueueLength to 64 and see if that helps alleviate the problem wfSyncUnderFlowTx get wfSyncEntry 44 This shows the number of incomplete frames that the router transmitted because the device queue emptied This problem usually occurs when you out clock the router s port Certain link modules such as the DSDE 5430 support only a 600 KB aggregate throughput if the port is receiving a T1 clock signal the link will be operational but underflow errors can occ
229. slot 0x90000013 3 GAME 66 BackBone s 3 LOADER 2 Loader ea env 0x00006009 flags 0x1 3 GAME 200 Board ID 2 GAME 199 Board ID 3 GAME 201 Board ID 3 OADER 2 Loader 92 env 0x00006009 flags 0x1 3 OADER 2 Loader 42 env 0x00006009 flags 0x1 MIB 12 Attempting to 3 MIB 64 Getting 2 MIB 15 Serving 2 MIB 16 Finished Troubleshooting Routers 238 mm dd yy 11 48 49 932 D EBUG 3 configuration from remote slot 0xa0000011 239 mm dd yy initializing 240 mm dd yy 11 48 49 959 DE 11 48 49 936 I FO 3 BUG 3 loading a 7 60 type configuration M M MIB IB 13 Received IB 3 Service 70 Config manager Slot 3 tries to start the Technician Interface and TI_RUI soloists but because they are already running on Slot 2 the soloist elections fail elections logged as LOST 244 mm dd yy 11 48 50 045 DEBUG 3 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00015 election LOST 0xb0000000 repl b0000009 30000000 SOLO 0x00015 election CLOSING 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 245 mm dd yy 11 48 50 072 DEBUG 3 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00015 election CLOSED 0x10000000 repl b0000009 30000000 246 mm dd yy 11 48 50 107 DEBUG 3 GAME 23 SOLO 0x00057 election opening 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 247 mm dd yy 11 48 50 115 D
230. ss field An example of a hexadecimal display of a PTP packet follows Pkt 9 04 22 94 08 07 52 812 PTP 54 Rx 00000000 03 03 01 80 c2 00 00 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 26 00000010 42 42 03 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00000020 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 80 01 00 00 00000030 14 00 02 00 Of 00 6b Od 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SDLC The SDLC protocol currently does not have a special data link filter offset If you configure a data link filter set the offset to 0 The data link filter works the same way that the MAC filter works An example of a hexadecimal display of an SDLC packet follows Pkt 1 07 20 95 14 45 27 910 SDLC 2 Tx 00000000 d1 bf SMDS The SMDS protocol currently does not have a special data link filter offset If you configure a data link filter set the offset to 0 The data link filter works the same way that the MAC filter works An example of a hexadecimal display of an SMDS packet follows Pkt 10 04 22 94 08 09 20 211 SMDS 88 Rx 00000000 05 03 00 00 00 87 00 4c el 58 07 97 12 12 ff ff 00000010 c1 58 07 97 54 36 ff ff 05 03 00 00 03 00 01 00 B 52 Token Ring Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture 00000020 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 aa aa 03 00 80 c2 00 Oe 00000030 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 00 00 X 25 The X 25 protocol currently does not have a special data link filter offset If you configure a data link filter set the offset
231. ssful connection is available between both routers connected via the dial on demand link 73 mm dd yy 13 13 23 673 Connector COM1 DSR has come up 74 mm dd yy 13 13 23 673 Connector COM1 75 mm dd yy 13 13 23 677 Connection estab RACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 54 INFO SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 31 Lished RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 43 A 25 Troubleshooting Routers Sending LCP Configure Request on circuit 2 76 mm dd yy 13 13 23 806 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 55 Received LCP Configure Ack on circuit 2 77 mm dd yy 13 13 25 930 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 54 Received LCP Configure Request on circuit 2 Sending LCP Configure Ack on circuit 2 78 mm dd yy 13 13 25 930 INFO SLOT 2 PPP Code 38 Link Establishment Phase complete on circuit 2 Starting Network Control Protocols on circuit 2 The PPP link over the dial on demand circuit establishes an LCP Link Control Protocol connection The IP software starts and IP establishes a connection over the dial on demand link 79 mm dd yy 13 13 25 930 TRACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 43 Sending IPCP Configure Request on circuit 2 80 mm dd yy 13 13 25 930 INFO SLOT 2 PPP Code 28 LCP up on circuit 2 81 mm dd yy 13 13 26 058 RACE SLOT 2 PPP Code 54 Received IPCP Configure Request on circuit 2 IPCP Naking IP Address option value 0x0 with value 0x2020201 on circuit 2a Sending
232. st determine whether the entry is in the routing table If the entry is in the routing table determine whether the next hop and metric are correct If the entry is not in the routing table do the following 1 Determine whether the router enabled RIP 2 Set RIP Listen on the RIP interface 3 Determine whether a RIP station on an attached network is sending RIP packets 4 Use Packet Capture or a network analyzer to capture the RIP packets and verify the accuracy of the advertisements from other RIP stations 6 14 Troubleshooting a Network Connection Problem Troubleshooting Open Shortest Path First OSPF Do the following to troubleshoot an OSPF routing problem 1 Use the Events Manager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for OSPF running on the slots in question The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eOSPF s lt s ot_no gt Note n Version 8 01 and higher you can restrict the amount of OSPF information that appears in a log Remove these filters when trying to troubleshoot a problem Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eOSPF s3 s4 Enter the following command to check the base records get wfOspfBase 0 The most important attributes are as follows e The State attribute shows whether OSPF is up 1 down 2 initializing 3 or not present 4 You cannot change this setting e The Cre
233. stored in buffer memory and keep the MIB instance for future captures 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 2 B 38 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Range Function MIB Object ID Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture State wfPktCaptureS tate 3 1 Up 1 Up I 2 Down 3 Init 4 Not present Up An interface has registered and is enabled Down An interface has registered but has been disabled Init Packet Capture is loaded on the slot but there is no interface registered for this instance Not present Packet Capture is not loaded on the slot that this instance is connected with Indicates the state of the Packet Capture subsystem 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 3 Filename wfPktCaptureFname 4 Set by Packet Capture code PCAP lt ssnn gt ss is the slot number and nn is a number from 00 to 99 Packet Capture sets this attribute which contains the filename that can be used to retrieve the file stored in buffer memory for this instance 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 4 B 39 Troubleshooting Routers Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Rang
234. t Entity 1 9 gates 1 9 get command 1 16 1 17 get command 8 3 getting help from a Bay Networks Technical Response Center xvii through CompuServe xvi through InfoFACTS service xvii through World Wide Web xvii GFWD GAME forward message type A 5 global memory 3 12 parameters 1 2 source route bridge settings 6 4 group LAN ID 6 4 group mode 5 2 5 16 GRPC GAME remote procedure call message type A 5 H heartbeat test 5 10 help from the Bay Networks Technical Response Center 8 1 to 8 3 host did not respond message 6 12 HOST ARP cache 6 11 hot swapping and fuses 3 2 cable support for 4 4 HPTP Packet Capture B 34 HSSI Packet Capture B 9 B 34 B 54 hybrid mode 5 2 ICMP echo requests 7 7 ifconfig a command 7 8 image names See router software image names or boot PROMs inbound Telnet See Telnet index of a logical line B 7 InfoFACTS service xvii informational events 1 7 instance 1 10 to 1 18 creating for Packet Capture B 6 deleting for Packet Capture B 16 format 1 15 interface definition 7 8 interframe time fill 5 18 internal clock settings 5 23 internal clocking MCT1 5 18 internal LAN ID 6 4 internal overrun errors 5 11 invalid ID can t parse cmd line message 6 22 invalid slot number can t parse cmd line message 6 22 IP 6 6 to 6 16 IP addresses UNIX 7 8 IPX 6 16 to 6 20 ISDN B Channel Packet Capture B 8 B 9 B 54 ISDN BRI
235. t No 2 in the Packet Capture file pktdump 102101 s2 P 0 kt 0000000 0000010 0000020 0000030 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 2 mm dd yy 10 20 28 196 a2 03 cl 66 00 00 00 00 1 80 80 00 00 00 a3 Of 00 51 51 OF CSMACD 60 Rx 00 a2 03 cl 66 00 00 00 a3 00 00 00 Oc 80 07 a3 00 00 01 00 81 02 01 01 00 Oc 00 00 00 00 14 00 00 00 00 00 B 14 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Pkt 3 mm dd yy 10 20 28 462 CSMACD 60 Rx 00000000 00 00 a2 00 93 c5 00 00 a2 00 93 c5 81 02 01 01 00000010 00 00 00 00 30 5b 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000020 a9 4b 16 aa e9 1d 00 00 00 00 a8 cO 00 00 00 00 00000030 14 00 02 00 Of 00 b6 05 5a 51 Of 00 00 00 00 00 Example 3 Enter the following command to display only the first packet in the Packet Capture file pktdump 102101 c1 Pkt 1 mm dd yy 10 20 26 430 CSMACD 60 Rx 00000000 01 80 c2 00 00 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 26 42 42 00000010 03 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 00 00000020 00 00 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 80 07 00 00 14 00 00000030 02 00 Of 00 3f 09 ef df 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 Example 4 Enter the following command to display only the second packet in the Packet Capture file pktdump 102101 s2 c1 Pkt 2 mm dd yy 10 20 28 196 CSMACD 60 Rx 00000000 00 00 a2 03 c1 66 00 00 a2 03 cl 66 81 02 01 01 00000010 00 00 00 00 00 1f 80 00 00 00 a3 00 00 Oc 00 00 0000002
236. t Routing Engine Fast Routing Engine 2 FDDI System Interface finite state machine File Transfer Protocol Gate Access Management Entity XX GFWD GH GRPC HSSI ICMP IEEE ILACC IP IPX ISAP ISDN LAN LAPB LB LBO LCP LED LLC LN LSDB LSP MAC NIS NVFS MCTI MIB MTU OSI OSPF PAP PC PCAP PCR About This Guide GAME forward Gate Handle GAME RPC High Speed Serial Interface Internet Control Message Protocol Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Integrated Local Area Communications Controller Internet Protocol Internet Packet Exchange Protocol internal services access point Integrated Services Digital Network local area network Link Access Procedure Balanced Learning Bridge line build out Link Control Protocol light emitting diode logical link control Link Node link state data base link state packet media access control Network Information Services nonvolatile file system multichannel T1 management information base maximum transfer unit Open Systems Interconnection Open Shortest Path First Password Authentication Protocol personal computer also program counter Packet Capture utility peak cell rate xxi Troubleshooting Routers PDU PPP PROM PTP PVC QENET RAM RI RIF RIP RJ RLSD ROM RQ RTM RPC SF SAP SAR SCR SNAP SNMP SPID SPEX SPX SQE SRM STM SWSERV TCP TFTP TEI TLRUI protocol data unit Point to Point Protocol programmable re
237. t named wfCSMACDEntry wfCSMACDEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX WfCSMACDEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION An entry in the csmacd table INDEX wfCSMACDSlot wf CSMACDConnector wfCSMACDTable 1 Use a period instead of a comma between the elements of an instance Thus you express Slot 10 Connector 1 as 10 1 when using the Technician Interface to get or change the values of attributes associated with this instance Troubleshooting Routers Example This example shows the instances of the object wfIpInterfaceEntry The instance format differs from that of the object wfCSMACDEntry list instances wfIpInterfaceEntry inst_ids 1 1 1 1 100 Tend 213702 Led 3st 102 1 1 4 1 103 dees E2 The INDEX field in the specification of the object named wflIpInterfaceEntry in the ip mib file shows that the instance format consists of the address of the IP interface and the circuit number wfIpInterfaceEntry OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX WfIpInterfaceEntry ACCESS not accessible STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION An IP interface description INDEX wfIpInterfaceAddr wfIpInterfaceCircuit wfIpInterfaceTable 1 You can use the following Technician Interface commands to access the MIB e list displays the object names and their associated numeric identifiers as previously described e get lt object gt lt attribute gt lt instance gt
238. t port and should either replace the link module or call the Bay Networks Technical Response Center Use the Technician Interface to look at the values of the following attributes in the wfCSMACDEntry object Or use the wfLine gt wfCSMACDTable Quick Get path to access them e wfCSMACDDelete This shows whether you configured CSMACD 1 or whether you did not 2 e wfCSMACDEnable This shows whether CSMACD is enabled 1 or disabled 2 on the line e wfCSMACDState This shows whether CSMACD is up 1 down 2 initializing 3 or not present 4 5 6 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem wfCSMACDOctetsRxOk This shows the number of bytes received without error wfCSMACDFramesRxOk This shows the number of frames received without error wfCSMACDOctetsTxOk This shows the number of bytes transmitted without error wfCSMACDFramesTxOk This shows the number of frames transmitted without error wfCSMACDDeferredTx This shows the number of deferred transmissions The Ethernet port detected a frame transmitting on the segment when it was preparing to transmit another frame This is not an error but an indication of a busy segment If this statistic changes rapidly determine why the segment is so busy wfCSMACDLateCollnTx This shows the number of late collisions transmitted A late collision transmission is a collision that takes place after the router transmits the first 64 bytes of a frame The Ethernet Controll
239. t the problem 3 20 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting a Physical Media Problem This chapter describes how to solve physical media problems It assumes you have already determined the scope of your problem as described in Chapter 2 This chapter includes the following sections e Making Sure the Link Module Is Working e Determining the Media Specific State ce Troubleshooting the Cable Connection Making Sure the Link Module Is Working Refer to the log to make sure that the link module and ports are enabled If they are not examine the log messages for the slot in question in order to determine whether they became disabled or never came up and why 4 1 Troubleshooting Routers Determining the Media Specific State Use the Statistics Manager Quick Get tool or the Technician Interface to check the media specific state of the connector in question Using the Quick Get tool access wfLine gt wf lt MEDIA gt Table to retrieve the State attribute Or using the Technician Interface enter the following command get lt object gt 3 lt s lot_no gt lt connector_no gt lt object gt is one of the following wfCSMACDEntry wfSyncEntry wfT1Entry wfE1Entry wffokenRingEntry wfFddiEntry or wfHssiEntry The numeric identifier of the state attribute for these objects is 3 For example enter get wfiCSMACDEntry 3 1 4 to display the state of Ethernet in Slot 1 Connector 4 You can use the wildca
240. t wiSyncEntry 79 2 1 The response is 202101 for Sync Example 2 Enter the following to get the line number of an FDDI interface get wfFddiEntry 44 2 1 The response is 602101 Enter the following command to create an instance set wfPktCaptureEntry 1 lt ine_no gt 1 commit The first 1 represents the wfPktCaptureDelete attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command The second 1 represents the numeric code for create Example Enter the following command to create an instance for Line Number 202101 set wfPktCaptureEntry 1 202101 1 commit B 9 Troubleshooting Routers Allocating Memory for the Packet Capture File You must allocate memory to store the Packet Capture file in order to capture packets By default the Packet Capture file uses 0 bytes of memory Allocate memory to the Packet Capture file as follows 1 Enter the following command to display the maximum number of contiguous bytes available get wfKernelEntry 6 lt s ot no gt lt value gt 6 represents the wfKernelMemoryMaxSegFree attribute Note The allocation of memory varies If the processors have memory restrictions enter this command every fifteen seconds for two to three minutes and record each response 2 Enter the followin
241. tToMediaEntry 6 10 wfIsdnBriLineNumber B 9 wfKernelBufOwnerTask 3 14 3 16 wiKernelEntry 5 12 wfKernelMemoryMaxSegFree B 10 wfKernParamEntry 3 14 wfLogicalLineNumber B 7 wfMCT1E1Load 5 17 wfMunichLoad 5 17 wfOspfBase 6 15 wfOspflfEntry 6 16 wiPktCapture lt Rx Tx gt Fltr lt no gt Match B 21 B 47 wfPktCapture lt Rx Tx gt Fltr lt no gt Offset B 23 B 45 Index 9 wfPktCapture lt Rx Tx gt Fltr lt no gt Ref B 22 B 46 wfPktCapture lt Rx Tx gt Fltr lt no gt Size B 23 B 47 wfPktCapture lt Rx Tx gt Fltr lt no gt Type B 20 B 44 wfPktCapture lt Rx Tx gt Fltr2Group B 24 B 48 wfPktCapture lt Rx Tx gt Trigger B 18 B 43 wfPktCaptureBufSize B 10 B 41 wfPktCaptureCapture B 40 wfPktCaptureControl B 12 B 40 wfPktCaptureCount B 42 wfPktCaptureDelete B 7 B 9 B 16 B 38 wfPktCaptureDirection B 17 B 42 wfPktCaptureDisable B 11 B 38 wfPktCaptureEntry B 35 wfPktCaptureFname B 39 wfPktCaptureLineLineNumber B 40 wfPktCaptureLoad B 5 wfPktCapturePktSize B 11 B 41 wfPktCaptureState B 39 wfPppWhoamiEntry 6 29 WFSM EXE cannot find file message 7 2 wfSwservOptsEntry 6 29 wfSyncEntry 5 19 wfTcpConnEntry 6 5 wfTokenRingEntry 5 25 wfTokenRingLineNumber B 8 WINSOCK DLL cannot find file message 7 2 working directory is invalid message 7 3 World Wide Web Bay Networks Home Page on xvii X X 21 5 21 X 25 Packet Capture B 53 XMODEM transferring files to Bay Networks 8 2
242. ta link filter set the offset to 0 The data link filter works the same way that the MAC filter works B 54 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture An example of a hexadecimal display of an ISDN frame follows Pkt 1 11 02 94 16 04 06 151 LAPD 26 Tx 00000000 00 ad 00 00 08 01 01 05 al 04 02 88 90 18 01 83 00000010 70 08 80 32 32 34 30 33 38 37 Interpreting a Packet Capture Instance Number When you create an instance of Packet Capture you refer to the MIB to get the numeric identifier called a line number of the datapath channel You then copy the line number when creating the Packet Capture instance The instructions are in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture earlier in this appendix Site Manager automatically creates the line numbers when you use it to create a configuration file A line number is a 10 digit decimal number that is unique for each datapath channel in a router Table B 2 shows the structure of a line number or Packet Capture instance number The top row in the table is for the most significant digit and the bottom row is for the least significant digits An example follows Table B 2 Structure of a Line Number No of Digits ee Reserved in the Field Description rsvd 1 Reserved and set to zero chan 2 Line index for devices that use multiple lines per channel zero for most boards type 2 The physical media type which is one of the following 1 fo
243. tect Pin F RI ring indicator Pin J DSR data set ready Pin E DTR data terminal ready Pin H Troubleshooting ISDN BRI and PRI Troubleshoot ISDN BRI and PRI as follows 1 ISDN PRI only Verify that MCT1 MCE1 initialized correctly Example 7 mm dd yy 10 38 39 363 DEBUG SLOT 4 DS1E1 Code 50 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 16 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 17 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 18 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 19 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 20 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 21 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 22 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 23 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 time_slot 24 Connector COM1 Logical Line 1 initialization complete Filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for the ISDN ISDN BRI and switched access services running on the slots in question The Technician Interface command is log fftwid elSDN elSDN_BRI eSWSERV s lt slot_no gt 6 27 Troubleshooting Routers Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eISDN eISDN_BRI eSWSERV s3 s4 Refer to the log to verify that Layer 2 and Layer 3 of ISDN started Example 21 mm dd yy 03 16 08 283 TRACE SLO 1 ISDN Code 16 Starting Layer 3 22 mm dd yy 03 16 08 286 TRACE SLO 1 ISDN Code 13
244. ter cannot connect to slave dial backup 6 25 MCT1 5 17 to 5 18 creating a Packet Capture instance B 6 event messages A 28 to A 36 internal clocking 5 18 mctlel exe file 5 18 media specific state 4 2 memalloc memory allocation event message 3 12 memory 3 12 allocating for Packet Capture B 10 card space shortage 3 11 errors Ethernet 5 9 MIB accessing via Technician Interface commands 1 16 specification 1 14 to 1 16 structure 1 10 walker 1 19 modem transferring files to Bay Networks 8 2 monitor script commands 1 19 Index 5 MTU maximum transfer unit maximum exceeded 5 3 multimode fiber orange 4 5 munich exe file 5 18 N netstat r command 6 8 Network General Sniffer converting for B 33 format 1 21 network unreachable message 1 20 6 8 6 11 no answer from called slot message 6 22 no data returned for ID message 6 22 no reply from slot s specified 3 14 non word aligned frames 5 10 number of zones on extended net conflict event message 6 3 O object does not exist message 1 18 objects 1 10 to 1 18 orange fiber 4 5 OSI 6 21 to 6 23 osidata command 6 21 out of resources message 3 12 P Packet Capture ATM B 50 bisynchronous B 50 converting B 33 CSMACD B 48 deleting an instance B 16 direction B 17 displaying configuration settings B 28 with a Sun or DOS PC B 33 with the Technician Interface B 13 enabling B 11 event messages B 29
245. the File 23 Displaying the File B 29 Troubleshooting Routers Getting the Name of the Packet Capture File To get a Packet Capture file stored in the router s memory you must know its name Enter the following command to get the filename get wfPkiCaptureEntry 4 lt ine_no gt lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command 4 represents the wfPktCaptureFname attribute The filename displayed is in the following format PCAP lt ssnn gt ss is the slot number nn is a number from 00 to 99 Example Enter the following command to display the name of the captured packets associated with Line No 102101 get wfPkiCaptureEntry 4 102101 Using FTP to Transfer the File When you use FTP to get a Packet Capture file the FTP software transfers it from the processor s memory instead of the media The procedure for using FTP to transfer a copy of a file to a Sun workstation or PC depends on the implementation of FTP on that system The following instructions apply to Sun workstations If you are using a PC and need instructions for using FTP refer to the documentation for the TCP IP stack installed on the PC Enter the following commands at the command line interface of the Sun workstation 1 Issue the following c
246. the state is not present the dynamic loader did not load the driver lower layer protocol on the slot Make sure the link or net module and port are up Then make sure the driver runs on the slot in the configuration of the router If the state is down check the log to determine the reason Do the Issue the clearlog command Use the Configuration Manager to set the Enable parameter to Disable or use the Technician Interface to set the Enable attribute Set the Enable parameter to Enable or set the Enable attribute to 1 following a Save the log b C to 2 d e View the log f If the media specific state is not up test the cable and the transceiver 4 3 Troubleshooting Routers 4 If the cable and the transceiver are OK use Packet Capture to test the reception and transmission of data as it passes through the cable Refer to Appendix B for instructions Troubleshooting the Cable Connection Check the cable that carries the data as follows 1 If this problem occurred after connecting a new cable make sure it is the proper cable for the application you are using Refer to the Cable Guide for Routers and BNX Platforms for guidelines Make sure that both sides of the cable firmly connect to the proper interfaces Note Do not use the connector position in one link module to determine the position of another Interface 1 of one type of link module may be on the left side and Interface 1 of another
247. ties The Program Item Properties window appears Make sure the settings in the Command Line and Working Directory match the directory of the WFSM EXE and configuration files Unable to Find UDP Port Numbers for SNMP Message The SERVICES file is in The NETMANAG directory if you are using Chameleon The ETC directory if you are using Distinct TCP IP Make sure the SERVICES file contains the following lines snmp_trap 162 udp snmp 161 udp Site Manager Won t Start on a UNIX Workstation If you are having problems starting Site Manager do the following 1 Verify that the workstation meets all of the minimum system requirements Enter the wfchkenv command to verify that the path variables and environment variables are set up correctly Make sure the link usr wf points to the directory where you installed Site Manager Enter the wfchkinst command to verify the installation 7 3 Troubleshooting Routers 4 Verify that you updated the etc services file correctly as follows e Ifthe workstation running Site Manager is accessing NIS Network Information Services update the etc services file on the workstation that is providing NIS e Ifthe workstation running Site Manager is not accessing NIS update the etc services file on the local workstation 5 Verify that no two processes bind to the same SNMP trap port number For example Site Manager and Sun Net Manager cannot both bind to the SNMP trap port
248. to a Frame Relay connection If not refer to Chapter 2 to determine whether these instructions apply to your problem Filter the log to display only messages from the Frame Relay entity running on the slots experiencing the problem The Technician Interface command is log fftwid eFR s lt s ot_no gt Example If you are filtering events from Slots 3 and 4 you enter log fftwid eFR s3 s4 Refer to the symptoms identified in the sections that follow e Log messages from Frame Relay Indicate Circuit Is Down 73 Frame Relay Switch Keeps Marking the Circuit as Down 73 Frame Relay Circuit Up but Protocol Data Is Not Transmitting e PVC Transmitting but Not Receiving e Frame Relay Configured with LMI Invokes an Xoff State Log messages from Frame Relay Indicate Circuit Is Down Troubleshoot as follows 1 Check the Sync interface statistics to determine whether the Sync interface is receiving and sending traffic 2 Make sure the status message timeout configurations of the switch and the router are the same 3 Determine whether the virtual circuit and synchronous interface are receiving packets 4 Make sure the circuit is enabled 5 14 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem Frame Relay Switch Keeps Marking the Circuit as Down Troubleshoot as follows 1 2 Check the polling interval configuration on the switch and router Check the log for any e
249. tructions only if the router you are using is user serviceable Routers that are not user serviceable such as the AN ASN ANH FN LN CN and AFN can cause electric shock Call the Bay Networks Technical Response Center if you lost a password in one of these types of routers When you create or change a password the router distributes it to each FRE processor module which in turn stores the new password on the local ROM read only memory chip If you remember the old password and want to change it or you want to add password security for the first time refer to the System Administration chapter in Using Technician Interface Software for instructions To replace a lost password you need a FRE module that never operated in a router requiring a password or one that operated in a router for which you know the password Replace a lost password as follows 1 Disengage the thumb clips that secure all FRE processor modules to the slots and pull each module slightly to disconnect it from the backplane Never completely remove more than one processor module from its slot Danger Never operate a router with more than one processor module completely removed from its slot 2 Remove one processor module from its slot 3 Insert a FRE processor module that has never operated in a router that required a password or one that operated in a router for which you know the password 4 Insert the memory card containing the route
250. ttribute values only when it starts To make Packet Capture respond to a change to an attribute value stop it and restart it If you configure an invalid value for an attribute an error message appears in the log Basic Parameters The basic parameters are common to all Packet Capture configurations The basic parameters described in this section are as follows e Disable e Delete e Filename e State e Line Number e Control e Capture e Packet Size e Buffer Size e Direction e Count B 37 Troubleshooting Routers Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Delete wfPktCaptureDelete 1 1 Create 1 Create 2 Delete The Create value reserves a memory location for a Packet Capture instance Delete removes it Use the 1 setting to create the instance Use the 2 setting to delete the instance if you do not plan to use it again in order to free the resources that Packet Capture uses 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 21 1 1 1 Disable wfPktCaptureDisable 2 1 Enable 1 Enable 2 Disable Controls the state of the Packet Capture instance Disabling an instance frees all resources allocated for the instance If you had previously allocated a file stored in buffer memory disabling the instance is an easy way to free the file
251. uffers are currently free in the slot get wfKernelEntry lt s ot gt Goto Memory or Buffer Problem in Chapter 3 if you need an explanation of the memory issues Increase the size of the reception queue by setting the wfFddiEntry 43 attribute wfFDDICfgRxQueueLength The maximum setting is 255 wfFDDITxClipFrames get wfFddiEntry 40 This shows the number of frames clipped or dropped that the router could not add to the driver s transmission routine because of transmission congestion Determine what type of data is overrunning the transmission port by using a network analyzer or the router s Packet Capture utility Use the following command to verify how many buffers are currently free in the slot get wfKernelEntry lt s ot gt Go to Memory or Buffer Problem in Chapter 3 for an explanation of the memory issues Increase the size of the transmission queue by setting the wfFddiEntry 42 attribute wfFDDICfgTxQueueLength The maximum setting is 255 Enter the Technician Interface get wfFddiSmtEntry 9 command Or use this Quick Get path to access it wfLine gt wfFddiGroup gt wfFddiSmtGroup gt wfFddiSmtTable gt wfFddiSmtCfState This shows the connection of the station to the ring The codes are a follows 1 isolated 2 wrap S 3 wrap A 5 12 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem 4 wrap B This state indicates that the A and B ports connect to two different concentrators t
252. ur 3 Refer to one of the following sections if it pertains to your problem Checking the Address Format Bay Networks Standard Only Troubleshooting a Synchronous to X 21 Connection 23 Reception Errors Incrementing or Reception Count Not Incrementing Troubleshooting the Internal Clock Settings Lab Environments Only 5 20 Troubleshooting a Data Link Connection Problem Checking the Address Format Bay Networks Standard Only If the router is running Version 7 0 or later of the Bay Networks Standard protocol and you defined explicit addressing make sure the addresses are in decimal format The addresses in a Series 5 router are in hexadecimal format If the address is greater than 9 and in the wrong format the synchronous link fails to come up Troubleshooting a Synchronous to X 21 Connection If you connect a Bay Networks router running Series 7 or Series 8 software to a device with an X 21 interface do the following 1 Set the appropriate Com port jumpers on the Ethernet link module to the X 21 setting Refer to Installing and Maintaining BN Routers for instructions 2 Enter the following command get wfSyncEntry 76 3 Make sure that you set the synchronous polling in the router s synchronous line driver configuration to 2 disabled which is the default setting If it is 1 enabled and the DSR data set ready lead drops the software disables the synchronous driver When you
253. ured for dial on demand and set the Debug option under the Modem definition to Enabled If you are using the Technician Interface set attribute 29 the debug attribute of the object wf ModemlfEntry to 1 1 enabled 2 disabled The Debug option is available with Software Version 8 01 and later The following message indicates that the Sync software module enabled the COM 1 port 9 mm dd yy 13 07 24 725 INFO SLOT 2 SYNC Code 9 Connector COM1 enabled The port completes initialization 10 mm dd yy 13 07 24 995 DEBUG SLOT 2 SYNC Code 16 Connector COM1 initialization complete Environment address 3051ea30 Line record address 3052e03c Hardware map address 30526e3c Initialization block 80007c00 Receive descriptor ring 80006000 Transmit descriptor ring 80006800 11 mm dd yy 13 07 24 995 DEBUG SLOT 2 PCAP Code 67 interface became local line 202101 intf gate spawned line 202101 A 22 Reading the Event Log 12 mm dd yy 13 07 25 002 DEBUG SLOT 2 PCAP Code 65 wait_state line 202101 The FSM finite state machine messages indicate that communication between the modem and the router is occurring The first FSM message shows the state the router is currently in when the FSM Event that follows occurred 13 mm dd yy 13 07 26 031 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_ DISCONNECTED 0 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_CCT_UP 1 isdn flags 0x
254. ut failed to receive a response Do the following a Verify that the router interface has a path to the PC b Verify that the segment on which the workstation is located does not contain duplicate IP addresses c Issue the Technician Interface get wflpInterfaceEntry 45 to display the number of ICMP echo requests the interface received for that IP address After the workstation can ping the local router interface and receive a response ping another interface on the router to determine whether the end node knows how to get off the local network If this test fails check the routing table on the UNIX workstation Target Does Not Respond or Similar Message The destination node of the ping request failed to respond To determine whether the pinged node is in the local ARP cache issue the arp a command Most UNIX workstations display the current ARP cache in response to this command If the MAC address of the station pinged unsuccessfully is in the ARP cache check the pinged interface s wfIpInterfaceEntry statistics If the MAC address is not in the ARP cache do the following 1 Enter the following command to check the workstation s interface definition ifconfig a The workstation displays all of the assigned IP addresses and subnet masks From other nodes on the segment ping the router s interface From other nodes on the segment ping the workstation from which you are trying to establish a Site Manager conne
255. ut link state packets LSPs path control blocks and adjacency control blocks The console displays the database information you requested or an error message For example if you enter an osidata s 2 t Isp_L1 i aaaaaaaaaaaa0000 command to request a Level 1 LSP with the LSP ID aaaaaaaaaaaa0000 from the OSI service installed on Slot 2 and the OSI service responds to the request the Technician Interface console displays messages similar to the following L2 LSPID aaaaaaaaaaaa0000 SRM_flags 0 0 0 0 SSN_flags 0 0 0 0 Ctrl flags 8 Lifetime 1200 Seqnum 2 Chksum 9b9a Flags 03 01040349 0040020c 00148080 80aaaaaa aaaaaa0l 0300080 8080aaaa aaaaaaaa If the OSI service cannot respond to the request for data the console may display one of the following error messages Invalid slot number can t parse cmd line The slot does not exist Invalid ID can t parse cmd line You entered a number of bytes other than eight for the LSP ID o answer from called slot The OSI service is not installed on the specified slot o data returned for ID message An LSP does not exist for the specified ID on the specified slot Unknown database object type can t parse cmd line You entered an invalid value with the t lt type gt option To display the LSP ID use the osilllsp or osil2Isp alias depending on the level 1 or 2 The alias definitions are osilllsp echo L1 LSPDB get wfOsiL1LspHdrEntry 1 e osil2Isp ec
256. ve Site Manager Workstation to Enable Access e Using the Technician Interface to Enable Access e Cannot Connect after Upgrading a Series 5 Router e Cannot Connect Site Manager Running on aPC 3 Cannot Connect Site Manager Running on a UNIX Workstation 23 Cannot Allocate Colormap Message Using an Alternative Site Manager Workstation to Enable Access Enable SNMP access as follows 1 2 3 Access a workstation that allows you to connect to the router Start the Configuration Manager in dynamic mode Select Protocols gt IP gt SNMP gt Communities The SNMP Community list appears Select Community Managers If the manager list does not contain the IP address of the Site Manager workstation that failed select Manager gt Add Manager and add it 7 5 Troubleshooting Routers Using the Technician Interface to Enable Access Enable SNMP access as follows 1 Enter the following Technician Interface command get wfSnmpMgrEntry 4 The following line appears for each workstation configured as an SNMP manager wfSnmpMgrEntry wfSnmpMgrName lt community index gt lt IP address gt nil 3 An IP address of 0 0 0 0 allows any workstation to become an SNMP manager If the manager name list does not contain the IP address of the Site Manager workstation that failed assign one Try again to establish an IP connection with the router Cannot Connect aft
257. vents issued by Frame Relay to determine the status of the Frame Relay link Frame Relay Circuit Up but Protocol Data Is Not Transmitting Troubleshoot as follows 1 2 3 Check the DLCI data link control identifier protocol configuration Check the routing tables for the correct routing information Check to see whether this problem is affecting all protocols or a single one Examine the FrVcError statistics to determine whether the router is dropping any packets Display the values of the VcCircuitEntry in order to determine whether the switch initiated flow control Display the wfFrVCircuitEntry values and check the number of FECNs Forward Explicit Congestion Notifications and BECNs Backward Explicit Congestion Notifications The attribute names for FECNs and BECNs are wfFrCircuitReceivedFECNs and wfFrCircuitReceivedBECNs The FECNs and BECNs indicate congestion on the network 5 15 Troubleshooting Routers PVC Transmitting but Not Receiving If the log reveals that the PVC permanent virtual circuit is active and the statistics reveal it is transmitting but not receiving do the following e Make sure that the Frame Relay switch at the remote side of the link supports the A bit The switch sends the A bit to the router to indicate it is up and active If the switch does not support the A bit the router has no way of determining whether the remote side of the link is down and thereby fails to disable
258. w on the selector points to the ID you want to use Figure 3 1 Make sure the configuration matches the slot dial setting pep Noor 2 GEE 8 Oo GEE 5 SB J oC O OMG GEE onl 4 N d 4 Figure 3 1 Verifying the Slot ID on an ASN b If the SPEX Net Module does not support hot swap make sure that a terminator plug connects to any unused ports labeled SPEX IN and SPEX OUT Make sure the thumbscrews on the terminator plug are tight If the ASNs are in a stack and they do not support hot swap you must terminate the SPEX IN port of the first ASN and the SPEX OUT port of the last ASN Make sure that for the remaining ASNs in the stack the SPEX OUT port of one ASN connects to the SPEX IN of the next Note The ASN cables are long enough to skip one ASN in the stack for troubleshooting purposes 3 5 Troubleshooting Routers Checking the Boot PROMs Make sure that the boot PROM images are compatible with the router software image as follows Check the boot PROMs as follows 1 Enter the following command to display the software version of each boot PROM get wfHwEntry 19 The slot number containing the boot PROM follows the dot after the wfHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource object name Example get wfHwEntry 19 wfHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource wfHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource w
259. want to copy packets from more than one circuit and the circuits are on different I O modules add the hexadecimal values for the associated slots listed in Table B 1 and use the sum as the slot mask Example Capture packets from the I O modules inserted into Slots 3 4 8 and 10 as follows 1 Add the associated slot masks as follows Slot 3 0x20000000 Slot 4 0x10000000 Slot 8 0x01000000 Slot 10 0x00400000 0x31400000 2 Enter the sum in the set command as follows set wfProtocols 26 0 0x31400000 commit Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To create a Packet Capture record associated with a circuit or channel from which you want to copy packets you reference the circuit s line number A line number is a unique number used to identify a circuit Site Manager creates a line number each time you add a circuit to the router s configuration When you create a Packet Capture record it creates a set of default parameter values associated with the line number and stores them in the MIB The standard MIB term for this type of record is an instance Refer to the instructions in the section that applies to you e Creating an Instance for MCT1 23 Creating an Instance for Other Media Creating an Instance for MCT1 MCT uses logical lines within a physical connector Each MCT1 line number represents a logical line B 6 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Get th
260. wfPktCaptureRxFltr1 Type attribute 24 for Receive Filter 2 24 represents the wfPktCaptureRxFltr2Type attribute 19 for Transmit Filter 1 19 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFltr1Type attribute 30 for Transmit Filter 2 30 represents the wfPktCaptureTxFltr2Type attribute lt line_no gt is the number displayed after you issued the get command in Creating an Instance of Packet Capture To list the current line numbers associated with Packet Capture enter the list instances wfPktCaptureEntry command lt value gt is 1 if you want Packet Capture to copy only the packets containing the data that matches the string 2 if you want Packet Capture to terminate when it matches data in a packet to the string Packet Capture does not copy the packet containing the match 3 if you want Packet Capture to copy every packet on a circuit regardless of its contents If you use this setting Packet Capture does not use the remaining parameter settings for the associated filter B 20 Using the Technician Interface to Configure and Run Packet Capture Note You can configure a filter as a capture type 1 or a trigger type 2 but not both If you configure two receive filters one a capture filter and the other a trigger filter make Filter 2 the trigger filter Specifying the String to Compare with the Packet Data Enter the following Technician Interface command to create a string of characters to match with the packet set wfPktCa
261. without knowing how you solved it 1 24 Chapter 2 Determining the Scope of a Problem This chapter poses the initial questions you should answer to narrow the cause of a problem to such topics as router operation router software the physical layer the data link layer or the network layer Subsequent chapters provide instructions on how to isolate and solve problems further The instructions in this chapter tell you which chapters you should go to after determining the scope of a problem Determine the scope of a problem by researching and writing down the answers to the following questions 1 What are the symptoms of the problem The more information you have about the symptoms of the problem the more easily you can identify the cause Note The symptoms of a problem and the underlying cause of the problem are not necessarily the same For example if you cannot ping an IP router the symptom is that you cannot ping the router the cause may be a loose cable 2 When did each symptom begin Write down the time you learned about each symptom Examine the event log for event messages that indicate when the problem occurred Read the event message descriptions for clues 3 What recent changes could have contributed to the problem e Reconfiguration e Moved nodes e Added segments e Increased traffic 2 1 Troubleshooting Routers Are you using a workaround to prevent the symptoms from occurring If so what
262. x95 and file system control soloist gate ID 0x98 are electing which slots to run on 107 mm dd yy 11 48 36 346 DEBUG 2 GAME 23 SOLO 0x00095 election OPENING 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 108 mm dd yy 11 48 36 361 DEBUG 2 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00095 election WON 0x20000000 repl b0000009 30000000 SOLO 0x00095 election CLOSING 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 109 mm dd yy 11 48 36 361 INFO 2 STA 5 Service initializing 110 mm dd yy 11 48 36 385 DEBUG 2 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00095 election CLOSED 0x20000000 repl b0000009 30000000 111 mm dd yy 11 48 36 385 DEBUG 2 LOADER 2 Loader starting service gate 0x00095 0x300a0932 env 0x00000000 flags 0x3 A 6 Reading the Event Log 112 mm dd yy 11 48 36 502 DEBUG 2 LOADER 2 Loader starting service gate 0x00074 0x300a17b2 env 0x00000000 flags 0x1 113 mm dd yy 11 48 36 502 INFO 2 SYS 3 Service initializing 114 mm dd yy 11 48 36 510 WARI 2 SYS 2 No system record configured creating one 115 mm dd yy 11 48 36 631 DEBUG 2 GAME 23 SOLO 0x00098 election opening 30000000 30000000 30000000 vote 00000000 116 mm dd yy 11 48 36 643 DEBUG 2 GAME 97 SOLO 0x00098 election WON 0x20000000 repl b0000009 30000000 117 mm dd yy 11 48 36 646 DEBUG 2 GAME 23 SOLO 0x00098 election CLOSING 30000
263. xceeds its inactivity timeout threshold and drops DTR to terminate the connection to the modem 27 mm dd yy 13 10 17 446 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_ WAIT _FOR_ADAP_RSP 3 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_TO 0 isdn flags 0x4009 isdn_fsm_TO_WAIT calling drop_dtr 28 mm dd yy 13 10 18 518 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 27 Connector COM1 Connection timeout retry in progress 29 mm dd yy 13 10 18 518 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Before g_delay for retry timer in isdn_fsm_CONN_DELAY_IND T The router reinitializes the link with the modem after detecting CTS is high 7 30 mm dd yy 13 10 18 784 TRAC Connector COM1 CTS has come up 31 mm dd yy 13 10 18 784 DEBUG SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 9 Connector COM1 modem present V 25bis mode SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 53 Once again the router sends the CRN to the modem A 24 Reading the Event Log 32 mm dd yy 13 10 18 784 TRACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 35 Connector COM1 Sent CRN cmd to T3053 65 mm dd yy 13 12 58 985 RACE SLOT 2 MODEMIF Code 35 Connector COM1 Sent CRN cmd to T3053 66 mm dd yy 13 12 59 032 DEBUG SLOT 2 SWSERV Code 46 Connector COM1 FSM State V25BIS_ WAIT _FOR_ADAP_RSP 3 Connector COM1 FSM Event V25BIS_EVENT_VALID_RSP 8 isdn flags 0x4009 The messages assume that you reconnected the cable to th
264. y 11 48 39 428 is closing file bn exe DEBUG 2 exe DEBUG 2 LOADER 30 NVFS 64 Image ipx exe NVES manager IPX initialized and the IPX RTM routing table manager and IPX STM server table manager are starting up and setting the maps to indicate which slots they are running on The configured IPX network number is 000000aa 143 mm dd yy 11 48 39 447 starting application ipx exe 144 mm dd yy 11 48 39 471 slot 2 145 mm dd yy 11 48 39 471 initializing 146 mm dd yy 11 48 39 479 slot 2 147 mm dd yy 11 48 39 486 149 mm dd yy 11 48 39 518 for slot 2 is up 150 mm dd yy 11 48 39 525 151 mm dd yy 11 48 39 545 is opening file bn exe for r map old 0000006E new A000006E map old 0000006C new A000006C address 0x304afec0 DEBUG 2 LOAD ER 15 Loader gate id 0x0006b DEBUG 2 IPX 28 IPX RTM up on INFO 2 IPX 1 IPX Protocol DEBUG 2 IPX 38 IPX STM up on DEBUG 2 IPX 41 IPX STM self DEBUG 2 IPX 25 IPX DARP gate DEBUG 2 IPX 40 IPX RTM self DEBUG 2 NVFS 63 NVFS manager eading A 8 Reading the Event Log 152 mm dd yy 11 48 39 564 INFO 2 IPX 42 IPX ADD Nwif cct 1 Network 00 00 00 aa 153 mm dd yy 11 48 39 568 INFO 2 IPX 43 IPX Nwif from MIB Active cct 1 Network 00 00 00 aa IPX Network 00 00 00 aa mapped to cct 1
265. y menus and values of MIB objects without having to understand the MIB To enter script commands you must do the following 1 Use FTP or TFTP to transfer the scripts to a memory card installed in the router 2 Enter the run setpath command to access the setpath bat file to tell the router where to look for the script files You can then enter the show or monitor script commands with the name of the script menu you want to display The show command displays the statistics at the time you request them The monitor command displays statistics at the time you request them and continues to refresh the display so that you can see any changes to them As you become more proficient with the scripts you can specify a script file menu option without having to display a menu For example the show at command displays the AppleTalk script menu which includes the AARP table option The show at aarp command displays the AARP table Refer to Using Technician Interface Scripts for detailed instructions on setting up loading and using the scripts Using the Statistics Manager to Access the MIB The Statistics Manager tools allow you to monitor a router s status and performance from the Site Manager workstation You can access the statistical values in the MIB by using the following options in the Tools menu of the Statistics Manager window e The Quick Get tool allows you to click your way down the MIB tree to a MIB attribute and retrieve its va
266. ystem stores the file If the file does not fit the file system logs a message indicating the problem However if you save a file from the router s memory to the memory card or transfer a file from an external device to the memory card using TFTP or FTP and the memory card does not have space for the file the file management system writes the file until it runs out of space logs an out of space message and aborts the save or transfer operation If this occurs delete the partial file and compact the files on the memory card To view the status of a memory card display its directory The directory display shows the amount of available free space or free space and the amount of contiguous free space The available free space or free space is the total number of bytes of unused space and bytes of space used by files that are deleted Troubleshooting Routers In order for the memory card to accommodate a file the file s size must be less than or equal to the contiguous free space The contiguous free space is the number of bytes of unused space If the file you want to store is less than the available free space but more than the contiguous free space compact the existing files first When you finish compacting files on a memory card the contiguous free space matches the available free space Thus if the directory display shows that the memory card has 1000

Avaya Troubleshooting Routers Troubleshooting

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents